Home

REAPER Plus! The Power of SWS Extensions

1. 6 If you wish to add this custom action to your Zoom Edit toolbar or to one of the REAPER menus do this now using the same method as in Chapter 2 7 Using whichever method you selected at steps 5 and 6 execute this custom action several times Notice how the display of tracks within your folders is changed each time Notice also how you can do this regardless of whatever track s is are selected when the action is executed 8 Save the file 40 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 3 Building Simple Custom Action Macros This macro is actually quite a good example of how and when you might want to include both a Store and a Restore action within a custom action In this case you want to do something to a particular selection of tracks it happens to be folders but you might not want to lose the current track selection The answer is simply to store the current selection at the beginning of the macro and recall it at the end With a little thought you should find no shortage of ideas for track and folder management macros to suit your workflow Another example is shown below This macro will help you to claw back some screen real estate when you want it by finding and minimizing all tracks that do not contain any media items These could be folders tracks where you simply have not yet recorded FX or other busses or some combination of th
2. The following macro will do this for you Simply select the item where the FX have already been inserted and run this macro SWS Save selected item s SWS S amp M Copy FX chain from selected item Item Select all items in selected tracks SWS S amp M Paste FX chain to selected item s SWS Restore saved selected item s You would most likely want to enable the option to Consolidate Undo Points with this macro Some interesting points to note here are 1 After you run this macro the originally selected item will be selected again 2 You can then of course open the FX chain for any of the media items and make changes for example to add further effects or to adjust the parameters of the existing effects 3 This macro can also be used to remove all effects from all media items in a track Simply remove the effects from one item select it and run the macro 11 1 2 Toggle FX Bypass of Selected Folders plus Children It will often be likely that when you toggle the FX chain status of a folder between enabled and bypassed then you will want the effects in the child tracks to also be toggled at the same time One way of doing this is to manually keep selecting and deselecting the folder with all of its child tracks but that can be tedious and time consuming Another way is to use this macro kindly supplied by Evil Dragon SWS Save current track selection SWS Select children of selected folder track s SWS Toggle FX bypass
3. s ssssssssssnrnrnrnrnrnrrnnnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnennnnnnnnenennnennne 30 2 7 4 Takes Management and Manipulation s ssesesussssnsnnsnsnsnnnnnnrnrnrnrnrnrnnnnnnrnrnrnrnrnenenennrnrrnennne 31 Bra PT Fett sara iE n 32 LLO Maik Maaa ome ernari EEEa Gatien a aE NEERA 33 2 7 7 Managing Sends and ReceiveS nsnsnssnsnsrnrererennnnnnnnnrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnrnenenrnnnnnnnnrnrnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnne 34 A a e a E a i o E EN AI AAE E EE ANA A O ESAN AENA A E AT 34 2 7 9 Creating a Cue Bus Track n sssnsnsnenensrnnnnnnnnnnrnrnrnrnnennnnnnnrurnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnennennne 35 2 7 10 Track and Project TemplateS n n nnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnrrnrrnrnrnrnrnnnnnrnnrnrnrnrnrnrnnnnnnnnrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 36 2 7 11 Time Selection Cut Copy Paste Actions ccccscsessececsecneascecsecnearsnesnearsnecnseeersnseenensasngres 36 Lu PL SNS EONS ON eiiiai NNE teeters 37 ee Er S TE ERE 37 re pa a aea e A E A A AE A AE A E A 38 ALLI ondor I RERPER LAN oi T teased stent s aE EREE setae P Addi didaun ER Arnt Eiaa 38 3 Building Simple Custom Action Ma Cros cscccssesssssssesenensneneeeeeeneneseenenesseseeenenes 39 3 1 Custom Actions for Track and Folder ManaGement cscsscscssessececcecceteeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeensansaeenens 39 3 2 Simple Media Item Edit Play vc icisssiss aisasiereeeeesasdess asic 42 a te ch tac 0 saps emcee taiwan enh ganda aaa eit 44 4 SWS Project ManaGeMent cccscscscnsessseeesesenensneeeeeeeenensnseeceaeesen
4. These are Tint track panel backgrounds If enabled this causes the entire panel in the TCP and MCP to be colored with whatever color is selected for that track An example is shown on the right Set track label background to custom track colors This option is enabled by default It s effect can be seen in the earlier screen shots used in this section for example in Section 6 4 It causes the area behind the track name to be shaded with the selected track color oE Ge Ge Ge Tv 2 1 J D s d T h D i gix f x x uw 4 a E e EIEIE E e EIBIE 74 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 6 SWS Color Management The other main color settings appear on the Appearance Media page and are as follows F REAPER Preferences Defaults Media item appearance Audio Media item labels Device MID Devices Buffering Playback Recording Appearance Display media tem take name Display media item pitch playrate if set Draw item labels above rather than within the item Draw labels over solid background for easier reading Show labels for tems when item edges are not visible Draw labels when items are in compact view Media ltem take ratepitch Nommallabels Abbreviate Numbers only Peaks ayvetorms VLU Meters Theme Editing Be
5. Where a command invokes a toggle action such as solo or mute you can use it in any of three main ways By itself the command letter will act as a toggle Preceded by a plus it will force the action to be enabled Preceded by a minus it will force it to be disabled For example you could use m m or m to toggle mute enable mute or disable mute on a particular track selection 132 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 10 SWS ReaConsole V upper case p lower case p upper case 0 Toggle select tracks Increase decrease volume of selected or specified tracks Set volume of selected or specified tracks Adjust panning of selected track s or specified tracks Set pan position of selected track s or specified tracks Toggle solo status for selected track s or specified tracks 236 s3 5 9 12 s guit s verb s bass Toggle select track 2 Toggle select tracks 2 3 and 6 Toggle select tracks 3 5 and 9 thru 12 Toggle select all tracks whose names begin guit Toggle select all tracks whose names end verb Toggle select tracks named exactly Bass s mand banj Toggle select tracks whose names begin with v2 v1 8 v 3 v23 v3 5 7 2 vvox 2 5 V 5 vo V verb 2 V7 9 0 V2 5 8 1 p10 p 5 pguit 15 p12 13 8 P50 P 10 Pbanjo 23 P12 33 o 0 07 10 06 7 11 12 ovox o
6. ccccccceesssssesssssseeseeeeseeeees 87 Track Volume changing cccccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 133 TRACK SE ACHONS 3 coedntcndt onateratatannsugusananunuouaacenieeeaua eds 83 Tracklist column Dead ers 4 2 2 5 0e2sieevasceeeeicsenbeenctenentcedides 83 Tracklist commands and Options cccccsseeeseeecceeeeeeeees 82 Trackist Filter BOR sy carci esses ae eee aie alate 82 Tracklist keyboard shortcuts cccceessssssesesssessssseees 87 Tracklist manater ec jis al este ass Sconce eugene 81 Transport record stope eenei aai 30 X MCHA OSs ueria a EE EEE 11 MERAKIOS EXtCHSlONS J24dusssmonmAmemAnuunaeteuensdawde 21 Z ZOOMMACHONS eset hice hock Moe cot oid E 16 19
7. oom selection shown on the right Set selection to selected items Extend selection to next transient in selected items 15 Click on the lt immediately below the text Smart markers Smart markers gt f 16 Click on Add then select Action The Actions list Insert marker will be displayed Renner mark er ITs 17 Find the action SWS Disable marker actions click on it and click Select Customized menu 18 Find the action SWS Enable marker actions T emove selection click on it and click Select Close EO beta Set selection to selected items 19 Your display should now be similar to that shown on Extend selection to next transient in selected tems the right Smart markers gt 20 Click on the Save button to save your changes Guron Enable make aclone then on Close to close this window SWS Disable marker actions 21 Now as you play back your song you can right click Insert marker anywhere on the ruler and use the context menu to Reorder mavens turn smart markers on and off see below When they are disabled the project will play as normal not jumping from marker to marker Save the file 240163 3 4 40161 Remove selection ESC zoom selection Ctrl Num Set selection bo selected items Extend selection to next transient in selected items Smart markers tae P SS Enable marker actions Insert marker ShiFt m1 S S Disable marker ctions Reorder marker IDs Delete all markers 22
8. 1 Brady s Sona 2 Samantha s Song 4 4b L CAKA 1H Brady s Song 2 t Samantha s Song SH We Till The Soil 4H We Are The Boys A 1 00 129 1 00 257 1 00 0 oo pog I I I I I I k I B I I I I I I I i i I I 6 32 000 I I I I iT I I I L I soo one Brady s amp _s na TET an DE r EE een re i eee eke 4 an D20508 Once exported to the clipboard a formatted marker list can then be pasted into any word processor text editor or many other programs such as a text item within Adobe Photoshop so that it can be used for example as a track sheet a playlist or set list or as part of a CD cover 62 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 5 SWS Marker Management The process consists of four stages two of them within REAPER These are vy Define how you would like the list formatted vy Export the formatted list to the Windows clipboard Export Format vy Open the text editor word processor or other software application an dilit A Paste the material from the clipboard Export marker lisk Format string First char one of afrim Choosing the Export Format command from the SWS Marker List all only regions only markers menu causes the Export Format settings box to be displayed see Then in any order n i l d t s right n o counti starts at 1 Length in H M 5 d Description t Absolute time in H M S This bo
9. 97 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Command Option Action Explanation With Sends enabled the following track sends receives information is saved into and can be recalled with the snapshot The send type volume and pan settings Hardware outputs Other aspects such as send envelopes and send mutes are not saved with the snapshot Visibility This option has already been fully explored in Chapter 7 When this option is enabled the visibility status of tracks in both the TCP and the MCP are saved into and can be recalled with the snapshot With Selection enabled the current track selection will be saved with and can be recalled from the snapshot Filter on Recall With this option enabled only those aspects of the snapshots corresponding with those filter boxes which are ticked will be recalled with the snapshot Otherwise the entire snapshot will be recalled For example you may have saved a snapshot with the Custom selection of volume pan and FX Chain options all enabled If you recall it however with only the Volume option enabled and Filter on Recall also ticked then only the Volume levels will be recalled not the pan settings or the FX chains Selected Tracks Only When this option is enabled then the snapshot settings for those tracks that are currently selected wil
10. Clean current project directory Batch File Converter Quit Ctri Q D Mathew Brady Project Connaught Rangers Connaught Rangers APP D Mathew Brady Projectywe Till The Soie Till The Soil RPP D Mathew Brady ProjectiWe Are The BoysiWe Are The Boys APP D Mathew Brady Project Samantha Song Samantha Song RPF 48 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 4 SWS Project Management The SWS Project Management command can be found on REAPER s main file menu Choosing this command causes a menu to be displayed with four main options followed by a list of any projects that are related to the current project The menu options are as follows Command Comments Save list of all open projects Saves all currently open projects to a Reaper Project List RPL file This file can then be used to open all these projects together Open projects from list Allows you to select a RPL file and open it All projects listed in that file will then be opened Add related project s This command lets you build groups of project files so that they are linked less tightly than is the case with ordinary project lists Files within related project groups can be opened and closed individually without necessarily needing to open the whole group Delete related project s This command is used to remove a project from a list o
11. 5 8 2 Customizable Columns You can right click over the column header area to display a list of available a columns for that window any of which you can choose to display or hide as Time Tune IL you wish o 29 064 1 42 518 w Time You can also drag and drop column headers left or right to change the order 1 42 818 y Type 2 08 029 v ID 2 08 029 3 35 206 in which the columns are displayed l z ef z 5 4 w Description The context column header menu also has a Reset option which will restore its default layout Reset 5 8 3 Sort Items by Columns You can click once on any column header to sort the list according to that column For example click on Time to sort them in time order or on Type to sort all markers together then all regions Incidentally the time format used will be the same as whatever you set for the ruler 5 8 4 Keyboard Shortcuts Some of the SWS windows have more keyboard shortcuts than others These always work when the window has focus and at least one item in the list is selected Down Arrow Next row Delete Delete current selection Up Arrow Previous row Escape Close window 65 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 5 9 Marker Management Custom Actions and Macros Custom actions are by definition just that customized Different people will h
12. E Hide New Tracks on Vis Recall lt Hide Options With the filters Pan Volume and Solo still enabled Click on Full Mix 2 then on Delay and Reverb You will now hear only the desired track selection for Full Mix 2 Click on Initial Mix to now select this Save the file Right click over the Delay and Reverb snapshot and choose Show Snapshot Details You can see that this snapshot holds only holds the track Solo information This is why you are able to load it on top of other snapshots without affecting any settings other than the track solo status 102 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots Checkpoint Before moving on to the next tutorial it s important that you make sure you rea y understand what you have done here using your two snapshots Full Mix 1 and Full Mix 2 It isn t difficult but there are two important facts that you need to understand e When you create and save a new snapshot with the Custom option selected then only those filters which are currently selected will be saved into the snapshot see below When you recall a series of snapshots which use different filters you do not change the individual snapshot definitions e If you want to save a snapshot of one of these hybrid combinations of snapshot settings you could do so either by creating a new snapshot while that combination of
13. MID Hardware Output lt n output Send to orginal channels Receives Add new receive Receive from track 7 Guitar 1 Mat TPA Post Fader Post Pan lc s En MID All w gt All Delete 0 D0dB center T PF Post Fader Post Fan _ _ ee MIDE AlL gt All TPA Post Fader Post Pan a EM w MIDI All 0 0008 center Sma lee sa a ee Receive from track 8 Guitar 2 Mat Audio 1 2 ka BEE Receive trom track 9 Guitar 1 amp nne 0 0008 center Audio 17 2 35 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 Track and Project Templates Actions Filter templat Shortcut Description menakios oS menakioss oS menakioss oS menakios o WS menakiogs oWS menakios o WS menakioss oS menakioss oS menakioss OWS menakioss oS menakioss SWS menakios o WS menakios o WS menakiog o WS menakioss oS menakioss oS menakios ow S REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Find shortcut Section Main Load project template 1 Load project template 0z Load project template 03 Load project template 04 Load project template 05 Load project template 06 Load project template 07 Load project template 08 Load project template 09 Load project template 10 Load track template 01 Load track template U2 Load track template 03 Load track template 04 Load track template 0
14. REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 3 3 Track Archive Macro We ll look at one more example of how SWS actions can be built into custom action macros before going on from Chapters 4 thru 10 to examine each of the main SWS modules in more detail This simple track archive macro can be used to deal with tracks that are most probably no longer required as part of your project You don t want to delete them in case you later need to change your mind Instead you can mute them together with any sends or receives set their FX off line and hide them from track and mixer view This custom action will do this for you Edit Custom Action Filter route rec Custom action name _ sie Archive Track Mute selected tracks S S Restore selected track s mutes recenves children S S Mute all sends from selected track s SWS Save selected track s mutes recenves children SWS Mute all receives for selected track s S S Toggle mute on receives for selected track s Track Set all FX offline for selected tracks SW5 Unmute all receives for selected track s SWS Hide selected track s from MCP ws Hide selected track s from TCF Track Ungelect all tracks 4 Remove selected Consolidate undo points Show in actions menu You can then select any track or combination of tracks and run this custom action to essentially archive the track selection You should also consider in the Audio Page of your REAPER Preferences enabli
15. SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS 1 SWS Project Preferences Hide docker Hide master track in track control panel Metronome disable Metronome enable Restore auto crossfade state Restore transport repeat state Save auto crossfade state Save transport repeat state Set auto crossfade off Set auto crossfade on Set move envelope points with items off Set move envelope points with items on Set transport repeat state Show docker Show master track in track control panel Switch grid spacing Toggle default fade time to zero Toggle move cursor to end of recorded media on stop Transport Record stop Unset transport repeat state 12 12 SWS Track Parameter Actions SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS Bypass FX on selected track s Create and select first track Delete track s with children prompt Disable master FX Disable master parent send on selected track s Enable master FX Enable master parent send on selected track s Insert track above selected tracks Minimize selected track s Mute all receives for selected track s Mute all sends from selected track s Name selected track s like first sel item Restore master FX enabled state Save master FX enabled state Set selected track s monitor track media while recording Set selected track s record output mode based on items Toggle master parent send on s
16. This is another of those examples where the effects of your changes may be quite subtle and will be most easily discerned if you use headphones 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 If the file StayWithMe847 is not still open open it Open the SWS Snapshots window and make sure Full Track Mix is selected in the Filter column Make sure that Full Track Mix is selected in the Filter area and that Selected Tracks Only is not enabled Select the snapshot Full Mix 1 Select the Reverb bus JS LOSER Exciter Track 14 Reverbs folder not either of the _ individual reverb tracks az wet C Insert into its FX chain an Frequency Hz P gt 5207 0 instance of JS E Clip Boost dB A 71 0 LOSER Exciter For the 20 Harmonics a gt 15 0 sake of the exercise 43 Mix Back dE Far make the settings similar to those shown here right Click on the Clip Boost control with your mouse then click on the Track 14 Reverbs folder Param button and choose Show Exciter PL 100 R Track Envelope see right Frequency Hz Cha Sh eee is The Exciter Clip Boost envelope will Clip Boost d6 pug __ Show track envelope now be displayed in your Main Harmonics 2 thighs Parameter iddulation Arrangement View Mix Back dE Learn Alias parameter Add a node to this envelope at about 2 min 10 sec and another at about 2 min 47 sec Fis parameter list a Default c
17. Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Set next fade out shape for items Set previous fade in shape for items Set previous fade out shape for items Shuffle order of selected item s Shuffle order of selected item s 2 Skip select items from selected item s Skip select items in selected track s Split items at transients Spread selected item s over 4 tracks Spread selected item s over tracks Stop current media item preview Swing item positions Switch item contents to first cue Switch item contents to next cue Switch item contents to next cue preserve item length Switch item contents to previous cue Switch item contents to previous cue preserve item length Switch item contents to random cue Switch item contents to random cue preserve item length Switch item source file to next RPP in folder Switch item source file to next in folder Switch item source file to previous RPP in folder Switch item source file to previous in folder Switch item source file to random in folder Toggle selected item s selected randoml
18. compressors delay reverb etc to get an OK mix It also guides you thru the relationships some simple some complex that exist between the dimensions of sound and the dimensions of space It gives you the confidence to use this knowledge to transform your OK mixes into great mixes Although not light on theory it has a definite practical emphasis with links to archives containing some 40 or so project files with step by step examples These help you put your knowledge into practice Wow So much good stuff from mindbending advanced techniques to solid sensible advice this guide should have a positive effect on just about anybody interested in mixing and especially those using REAPER Justin Frankel Cockos Inc developer of REAPER And from Amazon com http www amazon com REAPER Power Comprehensive Geoffrey Francis dp 1598638793 ref sr_1_11 ie UTF8 amp s books amp gid 1248039991 amp sr 1 11 REAPER Power Takes you beyond the User Guide which focuses mostly on how to do things and places more of an emphasis on the when and the why It s also designed to help you understand how REAPER s various components tools bits and pieces work together The book is comprehensive and includes a CD with more than 100 project files which demonstrate the various features of REAPER in action It also contains sample custom actions FX chains track templates and much more If you re an experienced user of another product perhap
19. Focus main window List FX chain slots Load Paste FX chain to selected item s all takes prompt for slot Load Paste FX chain to selected item s prompt for slot 151 SWSSNAPSHOT_APPLYLOAD SWSSNAPSHOT_FX SWSSNAPSHOT_MUTE SWSSNAPSHOT_PAN SWSSNAPSHOT_SELONLY SWSSNAPSHOT_TOGSEL SWSSNAPSHOT_SEND SWSSNAPSHOT_SOLO SWSSNAPSHOT_VIS SWSSNAPSHOT_VOL S amp M_FXBYPALL2 S amp M_FXBYP_SETON1 S amp M_FXBYP_SETON8 S amp M_FXBYP_SETONLAST S amp M_FXBYP_SETONSEL S amp M_CLRFXCHAIN1 S amp M_CLRFXCHAIN2 S amp M_CLRFXCHAIN3 S amp M_CLRFXCHAINSLOT S amp M_WNCLS2 S amp M_WNCLS3 S amp M_WNCLS4 S amp M_WNCLS1 S amp M_COPYFXCHAIN1 S amp M_COPYFXCHAINS5 S amp M_COPYSNDRCV1 S amp M_SENDS4 S amp M_SENDS2 S amp M_SENDS1 S amp M_SENDS3 S amp M_COPYFXCHAIN2 S amp M_COPYFXCHAIN6 S amp M_CUTSNDRCV1 S amp M_FLOATFX1 S amp M_FLOATFX8 S amp M_FLOATFXSEL S amp M_WNMAIN S amp M_SHOWFXCHAINSLOTS S amp M_TAKEFXCHAINp2 S amp M_TAKEFXCHAINp1 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS
20. Now right click over the text Full Mix 2 and choose Add Selected Tracks to Snapshot Right click again and choose Overwrite Snapshot Now view the Snapshot details this extra information is now recorded there Save the file ee X vet A delay Ima HA 600 delay with chorus feedback dE 5 0 output wet w chorus dE 6 0 chorus length m m B 20 13 Select Full Mix 3 Make whatever changes you like to the Others folder and the two harmonica tracks One suggestion is that you might like to pull it back a little further in the mix However do not at this stage use any automation or envelopes We ll get to those later 14 When you have finished select these tracks and add them to the snapshot Overwrite the snapshot and save the file 15 After this you have a number of options for how you handle your Initial Project snapshot Probably the easiest is to select it and mute the new harmonica track With the track selected you can then right click over Initial Project to first add the selected track to the snapshot and then overwrite it Undo History 16 Save the file Tip When you are working with mixing snapshots it can be helpful to keep your Undo History window open This makes it easy to go back to any previous step You should also consider under the General section of your Preferences enabling the following options Save Undo History wi
21. Of course you could do this manually but the task is made significantly easier by a number of SWS SM action commands Credit here must go to Jeffos from the REAPER forum for his input To create a cue track using one of these actions is simple vy Select the tracks that you want to send to the cue track vy Run one of the four cue bus track actions v Select the required hardware output from the displayed routing window see below Actions Comments Cue bus track from track selection prompt Creates a cue track with receives from each track selected and prompts you to enter a track name and send type 1 Post Fader Post Pan 2 Pre Fader Post FX 3 Pre FX Cue bus track from track selection Post Fader Post Pan Creates a cue track with Post Fader Post Pan receives from each track selected Cue bus track from track selection Pre Fader Post FX Creates a cue track with Pre Fader Post FX receives from each track selected Cue bus track from track selection Pre FX Creates a cue track with Pre FX receives from each track selected Routing for track 14 Cue Bus MasterParent Send dE center Sends Add new send Audio Hardware Outputs Add new hardware output Analog Out 5 gt Mind L klini A Phone L Phone A Main L Main A Analog Dut 5 6 L Delta 1070 Analog Out 5 6 A Delta 1010 Mini L 8 Mini A SOD eo PA m a Track Channels
22. SWS_SELMUTEDTRACKS SWS_SELNEXTFOLDER SWS_SELCHILDREN SWS_SELPARENTS SWS_SELRECARM SWS_SEL1 SWS_SEL32 SWS_SELTRKWITEM SWS_SELPARENTS2 SWS_SELPREVFOLDER SWS_SELSOLOEDTRACKS SWS_SELROUTED SWS_SELPHASETRACKS SWS_SETLTT SWS_TOGTRACKSEL SWS_TOGSELMASTER SWS_UNSELCHILDREN SWS_UNSELMASTER For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 SWS SWS Unselect parent s of selected folder track s Unselect rec armed track s 12 14 SWS Project Management SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS Add related project s Delete related project Open project list Open projects from list Open related project 1 Save list of open projects Switch to last project tab Switch to project tab 1 thru 10 12 15 SWS Snapshots SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS Recall snapshot 1 thru 12 Add selected track s to all snapshots Add selected track s to current snapshot Clear all snapshot filter options Copy current snapshot Copy new snapshot all track s Copy new snapshot selected track s Delete selected track s from all snapshots Delete selected track s from current snapshot New snapshot all tracks New snapshot selected track s New snapshot with current settings New
23. Swich item source file to nest in folder Senakios SWS Switch item source file to previous APP in folder Senakios SWS Saitoh tem source file to previous in folder senakios SWS Swich tem source file to random in folder aenakiogs SWS Toggle visibility of selected folder parent s children in miser Shortcuts for selected action E m Import enpart 39 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Looking through this list you might at first be puzzled at some of the items that have been included Why for example would you need to use an action Track Cycle Selected Folder Collapsed State when there is an icon on every folder which does this The answer to such questions is often this even though you might be unlikely to want to execute this action by itself it can nevertheless be very useful when included in a custom action along with other actions We re about to see an example of this Preparation 1 Open the file StayWithMe26 and save it as StayWithMe31 2 Weare going to create a custom action to toggle the display of the contents of all track folders Tutorial 1 Open the Actions List Editor Actions Show Actions List then click on the New button beside the text Custom Actions 2 Type a name Toggle Folder Display 3 Select first the action left pane SWS Save current track
24. The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 hMes4 RPP StayvvithMe RPP Sta Een CN RPP hez ail DALE 252 5 8 NI Sho Son 14 15 16 17 18 19 5 7 Now select the project tab StayWithMe54 RPP and load the marker set General Copy this marker set to the clipboard Select the project tab StayWithMe273 RPP and paste the marker set from the clipboard This marker set will now be displayed instead of the Vocals marker set Save the current marker set as General You can now switch between the two marker sets just as you did earlier You can of course add more markers to move markers remove markers and so on to any displayed set within either project and resave it Make sure that you save the project file StayWithMe273 RPP Exporting Formatted Marker Lists The ability to export formatted marker lists is a specialist one For the most part you are unlikely to have much use for this while you are building your projects However this feature could well come into its own as you approach the completion of your projects for example in any of the circumstances listed here Y Y pra m H ll a wI wJ i ne A re Ww I Cr i i e You are preparing a collection of songs to be burnt to CD see example below You are preparing material to be presented as a radio show Any other circumstances in which the contents of the project file can be seen as making up a whole program or collection rather than just a single song
25. and or MCP to reflect this 1 If the file StayWithMe847 is not still open open it Open the es Thresh SWS Snapshots window and make sure Full Track Mix is ssc selected in the Filter column O Babi Reaxcomp 4 Thresh In the Snapshots window select Full Mix 3 Display the Mixer View Display the Mixer context menu and enable the options Show FX Inserts When Size Permits and Show FX Parameters When Size Permits Display the FX Chain for the female vocal track Vox Anne It might be considered that those FX parameters most crucial to this FX chain are the Band 4 Gain on the EQ together with the Threshold Ratio and Gain on Band 4 of ReaXComp Select ReaEQ Click on the Band 4 Gain fader then on the Param button in the FX window This causes a menu to be displayed Click on Show in Track Controls Now select ReaXComp Repeat this process for the Band 4 parameters Threshold Ratio and Gain Your mixer panel should now be similar to that shown on the right Hold Ctrl while you click on the snapshot name Full Mix 3 Now whenever you recall this snapshot these controls will be displayed in your mixer panel 111 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 8 Now select Full Mix 2 For the sake of the exercise let s assume that the most critical controls for this FX chain are a
26. can help you to do this Before attempting an example you need to understand one more thing about the SWS and native REAPER actions Each one can be identified by its own reference number or command ID This is important because you will need to use these numbers if you are to be able to use smart markers If you open the actions list and scroll across to display the third column you will see these command IDs listed Shown below are the command IDs for the various Go To Marker actions Actions Filter to marker Find shortcut Section Main Shortcut Description CmdID Custom ID Markers Go to marker 1 40161 Markers Go to marker 10 40160 Markers Go to marker 2 40162 Markers Go to marker 3 40163 Markers Go to marker 4 40164 Markers Go to marker 5 40165 Markers Go to marker 6 40166 Markers Go to marker 40167 Markers Go to marker 8 40168 Markers Go to marker 9 40169 Markers Go to nest marker proect end 40173 Markers Go to previous marker project start 401 Fe Markers quantize tempo markers to MIDI resolution 40925 S S Copy marker set to clipboard Fae ie SWSMARKERLISTS S S Copy markers in time selection to clipboard relative to selection start B3255 SWSML_TOCLIPTIM S S Esport formatted marker list to clipboard Abs Sy SMAREEARLIST 11 SWS Open console with to add action marker 53018 SWSCONSOLEMAR S S Toggle marker actions enable 53185 SWS TOGGLE Shortcuts for selected action Cig Add
27. least when you are mixing You can right click over any send or receive there to adjust its parameters such as volume level pan and send or over any track displayed in the header row top or column left to make individual adjustments to any of its send or receive parameters However REAPER does natively lack easy options for some aspects of sends and receives management including a quick and easy way of muting and unmuting all sends or receives from or to a particular track This can at times be useful when you are mixing The following actions are available Actions Comments Mute all sends from selected track s Unmute all sends from selected track s These two actions can be used to respectively mute or unmute all sends from a single track or selection of tracks Toggle mute on receives for selected track s This single action toggles on and off the mute status of all receives on a track or selection of tracks Mute all receives for selected track s Unmute all receives for selected track s These two actions can be used to respectively mute or unmute all receives for a single track or selection of tracks 2 7 8 Master Track Actions More often than not the master track will require more repeated and careful attention than any of your other tracks and folders There are several SWS master track actions which can help you when you get to this stage Again remember that any of these can be
28. not be filtered from view in your visibility snapshots Let s take an example In the tutorials that you completed earlier in this chapter you created a visibility Snapshot called Vocals Only Suppose however that you later add some more tracks perhaps a fiddle and a mandolin By default these new tracks will not be filtered out so that when you select your Vocals Only snapshot the new fiddle and mandolin tracks will also be shown along with the vocal tracks Happily there is a way of getting round this using certain Snapshot window options and settings This will be fully explained in Chapter 8 complete with a tutorial 8 4 8 7 9 Custom Actions and Macros There s no specific custom actions or macros that I m going to suggest for this section This is because everybody s needs in this area are so personal Remember that back in Section 7 4 I suggested that you experiment by adding a few of the SWS track management and visibility actions to one of your toolbars You might find these particular commands helpful or you might not In either event what you should do is go thru the list carefully in the appropriate part of Chapter 12 to identify those that you might find useful to add to one of your toolbars or menus or for which you might wish to assign keyboard shortcuts 91 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Ex
29. 159 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions 1 Setting Up and Getting Started 1 Setting Up and Getting Started 1 1 Introducing the SWS Extensions The SWS extensions are a collection of items that individually and together add amazingly to the functionality and capabilities of REAPER They not only serve to improve your productivity and workflow they also give you features and capabilities that would otherwise not be available to you Some of these are small but nevertheless useful items Others should be regarded as major features in their own right Some examples of the capabilities that the SWS extensions put at your disposal are v The ability to quickly create and recall multiple loops and time selections within a project file vy The ability to create and use different sets of markers for use with different tracks or groups of tracks within a project v The ability to automate playback so that the cursor will automatically jump over those passages that at any point in time you do not need to audition v The ability to set up use and maintain a color management system for use with your project files See below Siew aucer ho dei Sas SSssakease SiS track color i Set to one random custom color Set track icon Set to random custom coloris Set to color gradient Set bo ordered custom colors be Set children to same color WH Set to custom color 1 WW Set to c
30. 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot Takes Management and Manipulation H Take Mixer Takes enabled then you should consider adding this tool to l the Media Item context menu see below gt eas pool R i Pa yil Eea d Jr q i Source properties Chrl F2 Item settings Item properties take east Takermisern Group d Item processing d Mext take T Extensions Item Take selection Previous take ShiFt T Fvkenciane Therm Take manimi ilakinirn b Delete ackive Fake Tutorial 1 Open the file StayWithMe26 and save it as StayWithMe273 Remove any markers and envelopes that are in this project from a previous tutorial Select the male vocal track and solo it Right click over the media item for this track and use the Takes context menu twice to make two duplicates of this take Display the Item Properties for Take 1 Select the Play All Takes option and lower the pitch by a semitone 1 00000 Display the Item Properties for Take 3 Select the Play All Takes option and raise the pitch by a semitone 1 00000 Save the file Display the Take Mixer Play the song Pan Take 1 towards the left and Take 3 towards the right Adjust the volume on the three takes so that the main vocal is prominent with the pitch shifted takes sitting well behind them Notice how the waveform peaks are redrawn see right Unsolo the track Adjust the level
31. Add an instance of JS Delay delay_chorus to the second of these Set the Delay time to 40 ms and the wet dry mix to somewhere between 30 and 40 Leave other settings at their defaults Save the file Play it Add an instance of ReaComp to the Others folder 7 Set the Threshold to about 25 dB ratio to about 4 1 Wet to about 2 0 dB and enable the Auto Release option Save the file 8 Make sure that the Others folder and its two child Harmonica tracks are selected Now right click over the text Full Mix 1 and choose Add Selected Tracks to Snapshot Right click again and choose Overwrite Snapshot Now view the snapshot details this extra information is now recorded there Save the file 106 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 9 Select Full Mix 2 Notice that the compressor disappears from the Others folder and your Harmonica pan and volume settings change 10 This time pan the two harmonica tracks about 45 left and right respectively and set their volumes to about 7 dB each Pan the Others folder about 30 right 11 Create a delay chorus effect in the second harmonica track similar to that used in step 5 above but with a delay time of 60 ms as shown right 27 output wet wro chorus dB i 6 0 12 Make sure that the a a a 00 Others folder and its two i EEn a 00 0 child Harmonica tracks are selected
32. Add volume envelopes for both the female vocal and male vocal tracks tracks 2 and 5 Adjust these envelopes so that between markers 3 and 4 the female vocal is a little louder and the male vocal a little quieter 23 Save the file again If you want a marker to run more than one action simply separate each command ID with a space You should not repeat the For example to cause the play cursor to go say marker 1 then stop playback you would label the marker 40161 1016 Try this Add two markers to this file one about 30 sec from the end the other just before the end Make the second of these a smart marker that will move the play cursor back to the previous marker and toggle FX bypass on the master track You ll need to search the actions list to find the correct command IDs Save the file Notes Actions can be added to REAPER s main toolbar its floating toolbar and most of its more commonly used menus including the MIDI toolbars menus The drop down list in the top left corner of the of the Customize Menus Toolbars shows those menus and toolbars that can be customized More detailed information about your various options when customizing menus and toolbars can be found in the REAPER User Guide Tip You can if you wish use text with your smart markers to include a descriptive comment For example you could use Go Prev Marker 40172 2 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores
33. Alt SHift F 2 Alt Shift F 3 Alt Shitt F 4 Hame All Track Height 60 All Track Height min Guitar Track Height 80 Wiew Whole Project Load state Edit shortcuts Auto save when switching screensets REAPER Track View Screen Sets Depending on which Save State options are enabled the following information may be included in and saved with your REAPER Track View Screen Sets Track heights Horizontal arrangement view zoom Play cursor position Track scroll position You can use REAPER s native commands to hide any track s in the TCP or MCP but not both or to use a text string e g vox as a filter to limit which tracks are shown in the TCP at any time This information is not saved with your REAPER track screen sets It will however be saved with any SWS track visibility Snapshot that you make when any such REAPER filter or track hide options are active Note The description above left column refers to SWS snapshots which are visibility snapshots only In Chapter 8 you will see how visibility snapshots can be combined with other track filters For the purposes of this current exercise and the tutorial that follows however you would be best advised to ignore these other track filters until you get to that chapter That s the theory Let s now look at an example of how you might wish to use these two features together in practice 89 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard cop
34. An example of a REAPER Track View Screen Sets window is shown on the right At first sight the behavior of each of these two features can sometimes appear to be in conflict with the other To a large extent this is because of the different ways in which they handle the management and display of your projects tracks The SWS Track Visibility Snapshots and REAPER s own Track View Screen Sets for the most part serve different purposes quite apart from each other However there will be the odd occasion where put together they might possibly serve up the occasional surprise 2 3 4 oo oie The following table summarizes the different functionality of SWS Track Visibility Snapshots and REAPER Track View Screen Sets After that you ll see some examples SWS Track Visibility Snapshots The only information saved in a SWS Track List visibility snapshot is as follows Which tracks are displayed in the TCP and in the MCP respectively and which are not With track visibility snapshots any track tracks or combination of tracks can be hidden or displayed in the TCP the MCP both or neither Other track status information such as track height track order mute solo status TCP width etc is not recorded in a pure visibility snapshot and is therefore not recalled with the snapshot but see note below Screen Sets Track view windows Per project track views Load key Save key Alt SHift F 1
35. Assist with Recording It s easy to forget that REAPER s Action List comes with a separate section available to be used when you are recording This means that you can assign keyboard shortcuts so that they automatically take on a different function when you are in recording mode Actions Filter w2 record Shotcut Description Find shortcut Section Main alt recording w CmdID Custom ID SWS Set selected track s monitor track media while recording 53078 _SWS_5ETMONME DIA SWS Set selected track s record output mode based on tems aie SWS SETRECSACU SWS Toggle move cursor to end of recorded media on stop A113 SWS TOGRECMOY S S Toggle ruler red while recording SWS Unset selected track s monitor track media while recording AWS UNSETMOMM Senakios SWS Set selected track s record armed _SENAFIOS SELTRA senakios S S Set selected track s record unarmed A470 _SENAKRIOS SELTRA Shortcuts for selected action Import esport Custom actions Hew Above are shown some of the SWS actions that you might find useful when you are recording Note that the keyboard shortcuts shown as assigned in the illustration are not default assignments The following explanatory notes might also prove helpful Actions Comments Toggle Ruler red while recording This is one of my favorites While you are recording the REAPER ruler is displayed as bright red It reverts to its normal color when stop recordin
36. Custom actions Mew Notice that this list includes a number of SWS actions which each have both a numeric Command ID and a text Custom ID Be careful if calling any of these actions in your Smart Markers The Command IDs are not permanent and are always subject to possible change in a later release For this reason you should use only the Custom ID labels when calling SWS Actions in Smart Markers 1 0 3 4 a B T E J In this next example you will learn how to v Turn an ordinary marker into a smart marker by attaching an action to it vy Add SWS actions to REAPER s menus More information about customizing REAPER menus is contained in the REAPER User Guide Meanwhile the example that follows will show you how to use smart markers to automatically jump from marker to marker when a song is being auditioned Of course so long as you have identified the command IDs or custom IDs you can attach any action you wish to a smart marker Preparation Open the file StayWithMe23 and immediately save it as StayWithMe26 You can now work thru the following tutorial without making any changes to StayWithMe23 25 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Tutorial 1 Position the cursor at about 1 min 06 sec and press Ctri 1 to create a marker numbered 1 2 Position the cursor at about 1 min
37. Delay 1 4 Vox Delay 2 5 Vox Mat Fan volume Mute v FX Chain Solo Sends Save changes Name Vocal Fx Update Project For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 10 Click on OK Save the file 11 You now have two snapshots for this project as ET the Initial Mix and the Name Date Time eal E ay Vocal FX with the different 1 Initial Mix 22 03 2010 8 12 AM Filter i Full Track Mix Master 5 tracks vol pan mute solo fx sends P ey 7 Custom 3 voca 21 03 2010 ole AM vocal settings Note that although we called the Snapshot Vocal FX because we applied all of the available filters it does also include all of the other settings such as Pan and Volume for the different tracks Had we wanted to paste only the FX into our destination project we could have ticked only that filter 12 As you switch between your two snapshots you will see that the Initial Mix snapshot retains its original settings for your vocals whilst your new Vocal FX snapshot uses all of the imported settings 13 Incidentally if you also included the Master in your source and destination tracks as we did here your master track settings will also have been copied and pasted from the one project to the other Tutorial Part 2 In the second part of this tutorial we will again take a copy of one of
38. Make your selection of files there then drag and drop to the Files pane of the SWS Media Pool window or Make your selection of files outside of REAPER altogether for example in a Windows Explorer window and drag and drop from there to the Files pane of the SWS Media Pool window or Make your selection in another DAW or other application such as Cakewalk SONAR s Loop Explorer and drag and drop from there to the Files pane of the SWS Media Pool window Note that Files from different folders and if you have multiple hard disks different drives can be stored together within a group The same file can be placed in more than one group if you wish You cannot add a file directly to Project group within the Media Pool window To do this you must add the file directly to the project itself in the Arrangement View window In the example shown below our Percussion group now contains eighteen items and our Guitars group five items SWS Media Pool Groups Group Global Path Filename Project 7 0 Samples GuibarOs way Percussion l De Samples GuibarO4 way Guitars G le De Samples GuibarOS way De Samples GuibarOl way De Samples GuibarOe way To show hide columns in As with other SWS windows the column headers context menu can be either pane used to determine which columns are displayed To sort the Groups or Files Click on any column header to use that column to sort the group or file list list Clicking a secon
39. Name Delete Snapshot Alt Click on Snapshot Name The Snapshots List Context Menu when right clicking over any item in the list Merge Into Project Opens the Snapshot Paste window for recalling only portions of the selected snapshot Enables you to rename the currently selected snapshot Show Snapshot Details Opens a window showing comprehensive information about exactly what settings have been saved into the selected snapshot Select Tracks in Snapshot Selects all tracks in the current snapshot in the TCP and in the MCP Add Selected Tracks to Adds to a snapshot any selected track s that do not already exist in that Snapshot snapshot to the current snapshot using the filter settings that match that snapshot Filter options in the Snapshots window are ignored Delete Selected Tracks from Deletes any track s currently selected from the current snapshot Snapshot Overwrite Snapshot Overwrites the snapshot contents with whatever changes you have made according to whichever filters are currently enabled and saves them Same as Ctril click on snapshot name 94 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots Command Option Action Explanation Delete Snapshot Deletes the currently selected snapshot Copy Snapshot Copies the current snapshot to the clipboard Export Snapshot Exports the current snapshot to
40. Overwrite snapshot Delete snapshot ris selection Tom Fi oon o o ke Copy snapshot J TEn F Filter on Recall Import snapshot Selected Tracks Only Ohead Left p00 pngg z hien eadpehot Prompt for Name i l a dmm 2 88dB 100 L i Paste snapshot re Hide New Tracks on Vis Recall OheadRight OB Bao o js o B f pag BG Dock Snapshots in Docker Dy ste oer MO _ Close window Merge into project Rename In this case we are able to set up our drum mix for one song panning volume levels FX sidechaining etc and save the entire drum folder as a snapshot Notice that both Full Track Mix and Selected Tracks Only have been enabled By right clicking over the snapshot name we are able to export it to a SWSSnap file We can then open any other project file in this collection display the SWS Snapshots window and use the Import Snapshot command to import our Drums Sean template Del Alt click Save Ctrl click Source track 4 Destination Filter 8 Drums Sean Drums Sean Pan Volume E T ss Mute 7 Fx Chain Snare Snare Li TomL Tom L solo sends 12 Tom R Tom F lis Select N 13 Ghead Left Ohead Left F Ti 20 14 OheadRight Ohead Right a afte a E T a a D x A m i A e P J 7 er aR r to aa E F b n j L i emis C Save changes gi Mame Because the tracks are given identical or similar names in all of the projects the software fi
41. Play the ivis Selection song Make sure that the w Filter on Recall Vocals folder and its four F7 Selected Tracks Only tracks are still selected Now T EEEE E A enable the option Selected Tracks Only and click on Full Mix 2 see right The vocal track settings will now be changed to match those of Full Mix 2 but the other track settlings will remain as they are in the Full Mix 1 snapshot 6 Now disable the option Selected Tracks Only Select Full Mix 2 again You have now selected this snapshot in its entirety 7 Now once again enable the option Selected Tracks Only Select the snapshot Full Mix 1 Your mix will consist of the vocal settings from Full Mix 1 and everything else from Full Mix 2 8 Let s say we like this combination and want to SWS Snapshots keep it as a new snapshot ees e 7 7 J te j First to make sure that the Delay and Reverb 18 03 2010 Filter n settings are saved for all I ate Cheat 3 C Full Track Mix tracks makes sure that l caw Full Mix 3 19 03 2010 O Current Visibility Selected Tracks Only is Initial Project 18 03 2010 disabled To make sure that Master 15 tracks vol pan mute solo Fx sends po Te volune all types of setting are Bri gaia aka saved make sure that the E i filter options Pan Volume Mute FX Chain Solo and Sends are all enabled 9 Click on New name your new snapshot Full Mix 3 and save the file 10 Click on the Name column header so that the snapshots are
42. Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 6 8 3 Auto Color Color Codes f SWS Auto Color As well as being able to choose your track and folder colors using the Windows color palette Filter Color you have a number of other options available Folder Ox4a69Ga to you from the context menu that is displayed a SEa when you right click in the Color column over Custom any filter item see right Gradient Random The available codes and their meaning are Summarized in the table below Mone Parent Lp in priority Note Down in priority Color management Your autocolor definitions and settings are Remove D Dock Autocolor in Docker stored in the reaper ini file Close Window Enable auto coloring Color Code Explanation This causes one of your set of previously defined custom colors to be applied to the filter The custom colors are applied in sequence For example if you select the custom item to be applied to a text filter Gu and you have three tracks which meet this criteria then the first of these will be assigned custom color 1 the second custom color 2 and the third custom color 3 This causes all tracks defined by this filter to be colored on a sliding scale using your color gradient definitions as specified in the Color Management window Random Tracks which meet the criteria for this filter are colored at random No color is applied to tracks meeting the criteria for this filter Tracks which meet this
43. ReaConsole Type bguit Acoustic see above right then press Enter Notice how the guitar tracks are renamed Save the file 136 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 10 SWS ReaConsole 10 4 Advanced ReaConsole Features In this page we will explore some of the less obvious and more advanced features of ReaConsole including v The AutoComplete feature v The Folder Child feature y Inverted Track Selection V Creating and using ReaConsole custom commands AutoComplete Folder Child Inverted Track Selection Custom Commands In some circumstances you can abbreviate track names without the use of wild cards For example if you have a track bus called Reverb and that is the only track whose name begins with R then you could type Or Ctrl Enter to exclusively solo that track Use the character after any folder name to apply a ReaConsole command to a folder track and all its children For example cguitars blue Ctrl Enter will change the track color to blue for a folder called Guitars and all of its child tracks The character can be used to apply a command to every track except that or those specified It must be placed immediately after the command ID For example m voc Ctrl Enter will toggle mute of all tracks except those whose name begin with the letters Voc M 2 4 Ctrl Enter will toggle mute of all
44. S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M item s SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M track s SWS S amp M SWS S amp M Load Paste FX chain to selected item s slot 1 thru 8 Load Paste FX chain to selected track s prompt for slot Load Paste FX chain to selected track s slot 1 thru 8 Paste FX chain to selected item s Paste FX chain to selected item s all takes Paste FX chain to selected track s Paste items or tracks with routing Remove receives for selected track s Select FX 1 thru 8 for selected track s Select next FX cycling for selected track s Select previous FX cycling for selected track s Set FX 1 thru 8 offline for selected track s Set FX 1 thru 8 online for selected track s Set last FX offline for selected track s Set last FX online for selected track s Set selected FX offline for selected track s Set selected FX online for selected track s Show FX chain FX 1 thru 8 for selected track s Show FX chain selected FX for selected track s Split MIDI or Audio at prior zero crossing Takes Build lane s for selected track s Takes Clear active take s item s Takes Move active down cycling in selected item s Takes Move active up cycling in selected item s Takes Move all down cycling in selected item s Takes Move all up cycling in selected item s Takes Remove ALL empty take ite
45. Toggle snapshot fx SWS New snapshot and edit name SWS restore snapshot filter options Volume Settings Snapshot Macro SWS Save current snapshot filter options SWS Clear all snapshot filter options SWS Toggle snapshot vol SWS New snapshot and edit name SWS restore snapshot filter options Pan Settings Snapshot Macro SWS Save current snapshot filter options SWS Clear all snapshot filter options SWS Toggle snapshot pan SWS New snapshot and edit name SWS restore snapshot filter options You could at any time run either of those macros in any project to create separate snapshots of your FX volume and pan settings without disturbing whatever filter options you had selected at the time the macros were executed 123 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 124 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 9 SWS Media Pool 9 SWS Media Pool At the time of writing the SWS Media Pool module is not yet fully developed and some features such as Play are still to be implemented Because of this this chapter will cover the topic in overview only This should give you more than enough information for you to start creating and working with your own media pool 9 1 SWS Media Pool Overview The purpose
46. Track Unsolo all tracks Unsolos any previously soloed tracks and Track Solo selected track s solos currently selected tracks instead Track Toggle FX bypass for selected Repeats playback of that portion of the song tracks between the two markers with FX alternately on and off for the currently selected and soloed tracks You can change the track selection as often as you wish Note Smart Markers can also be enabled and disabled using the toggle command Enable SWS Marker Actions from REAPER s main Options menu 28 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot 2 7 Some More Examples of Simple Actions Sections 2 4 and 2 5 included summary tables of some of the groups of simple SWS actions that can be used within REAPER either by assigning them to shortcut keys toolbar icons or custom menus There are of course many more It would be tedious in the extreme for this guide to attempt to work thru countless repetitive and similar exercises showing how these can be assigned The final chapter of this user guide contains summary lists in various categories of SWS and Xenakios actions If you browse this list even at this early stage you should be able to gather idea of how you might be able to use some of these As you progress thru this guide your understanding of how more and more of these can
47. a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 8 4 Some Case Studies and Tutorials Because SWS Snapshots open up so many different paths of opportunities for you this chapter will take a slightly different approach to tutorials than have the earlier chapters You will be given the opportunity to work thru a series of tutorials each designed to help yo understand one or two aspects of how you can use mixing snapshots These lessons build on each other To get the most out of these you are strongly advised to work thru the entire set In working thru the tutorials that follow in this section you will be asked to make numerous changes to various track and other parameters such as volume and pan levels FX settings sends and so on For the purpose of learning the actual values at which you set these parameters is not really important What matters is that you learn how to use the Snapshots window to create more flexible mixing options In particular note that Tutorial 8 will deal with the issues concerning visibility snapshots and project changes that were discussed near the end of Chapter 7 8 4 1 Tutorial 1 Snapshot Essentials Later we ll be returning to those visibility snapshots that we made in Chapter 7 and taking a look at how we can develop and build on them Meanwhile this first tutorial begins with a project that as yet does not include any mixer snapshots In this tutorial you will l
48. adjusted Lower the Volume faders of both the VoxVerb and Verb tracks by about 3 or 4 dB Move the Pan fader for VoxVerb about 20 left and move the Pan fader for Verb about 20 right Lower the Harmonica volume fader by about 2 decibels Do not left click on the Snapshot Full Mix 2 or your changes will be lost Instead either hold down Date 18 03 2010 18 03 2010 18 03 2010 Snapshot Details Time 1 30 PM 1 52 PM 1 37 PM Track 1 Vocals Volume O 23db Pan 49 left Mute off Salo off Fs bypass off Fis chain Sends To track 6 autars To track 14 VoxVerb Track 2 Vox Anne Volume 2 99db Pan 15 right Mute off Solo off Fx bypass off Fis chain YST Rea Cockos YST ReaComp Cockos Sends To track 3 Vox Delay 1 To track 4 Yox Delay 2 Track 3 Vox Delay 1 Volume 0 98db Pan 73 right Mute off Solo off Fa bypass off E3 Del Alt click Mew Save Ckrl click Filter Full Track Mix the Ctrl key and click on the snapshot name while you are holding it then release the Ctrl key or right click over the snapshot name and choose Overwrite Snapshot from the menu 100 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 19 Save the file As you play the song switch between the two snapshots Full Mix 1 and Full Mix 2 You should n
49. and open in that tab any other project one that doesn t really belong in this group 16 Repeat step 12 above to resave the project list 17 Close all files then open the projects from the list This will include the one that you just added 18 Close the project tab of the unwanted file see below Braw Sailing proj 5 5 REAPER v3 32pre3 File Edit Wiew Track Options Insert Actions Extensions Help iT Rraw Sailinn RPP I Mew project tab Chrl 4lk h eNO eB Bt 2 Cldse current project Ctri F4 A we wi we a wT w We Wwe We aha project tabs w Hide background project Fx MIDI windows soe w Run background projects UUW center Dd center Run stopped background projects Play stopped background projects with active project ogo Offline background project media aS a nan ES A mul i H rM 2 M 19 Repeat step 12 to resave the project list The list will be saved without the project that you just closed Note RPL Files Unfortunately Reaper Project List files share the same extension RPL as Reaper Preset Library files These latter files are created when you save FX presets into a library In practice this is unlikely to cause any real confusion Reaper Preset Library files are unlikely to be stored with your projects furthermore their file names include the name of the plug in with which they are associated for example reacomp dll rpl or reaeq dll rpl 51 For an authorised printable PDF versio
50. and sets of markers from one project to another In this section you will learn how to do this The two marker list Commands or actions to look out for in this section are Copy marker set to clipboard Paste marker set from clipboard Both of these are also available as SWS actions and can therefore be assigned to shortcut keys toolbars or menus as you wish In addition there is a further menu that you will not find on the Marker List menu SWS Copy markers in time selection to clipboard relative to selection start When you use this last action all markers within the current time selection are copied to the clipboard and their position is held relative to the time selection start When this selection is pasted into another project the time selection is reproduced relative to the current play cursor position in that project For example you might make a time selection from say 1 min 0 sec to 2 min 0 sec in one project and copy the markers in that selection into the clipboard If you switch to another project file and place the play cursor at say the 3 min 0 sec mark before pasting the markers from the clipboard then those markers will be copied and reproduced between 3 min 0 sec and 4 min 0 sec in this second project Tutorial Right now however we are going to work thru an example which copies marker sets from one project file to another 1 If the project file StayWithMe54 RPP is not still open from the previous tutorial open
51. and toolbars can be exported saved to file and imported retrieved using the Export and Import buttons at the bottom of the Customize Menus Toolbars window 2 11 I Wonder If REAPER Can In this chapter you have been shown a fairly broad selection of examples of how the SWS extensions can add extra functionality to REAPER Quite often finding the right action for the job can be an answer to one of those I wonder if REAPER can questions Be prepared to explore these actions for yourself and to grow in confidence as you grow in knowledge 38 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 3 Building Simple Custom Action Macros 3 Building Simple Custom Action Macros In this chapter you will learn how to build and execute your own simple custom action macros including in some cases both SWS actions and REAPER s own native actions By now you should already know how to assign actions to shortcut keys toolbars menus and if appropriate external control devices These sequences of instructions will therefore not be repeated Custom actions are created by stringing together two or more individual actions so that when the custom action is executed each of the individual actions that it contains are executed in sequence 3 1 Custom Actions for Track and Folder Management Let s start with the example of creating custom actions to help w
52. be used will increase Meanwhile the information in the summary tables below at least help to start to get you thinking The tables are of course far from 100 comprehensive nor with so many available actions could they be They show only a tiny handful of the many actions available and are there to help you get started Beyond these you must expect also to have to do some research for yourself if you are to derive the maximum benefit How you use this information or indeed whether you use it is then up to you 2 7 1 Track Slots Every track now has access to up to five memory slots for storing often complex item selections These are saved with the project file An example of how you might wish to use this is if you have a selection of say a half dozen items out of perhaps 20 on a track that you wish to edit in some way perhaps to adjust their volume or pitch Save the selection into a memory slot Make your edits Then if say a week later you want to make further edits to that same selection simply recall that memory slot You don t even need to remember exactly which items were included in the selection the process will automatically recall the correct selection Actions Comments Save selected track s selected item s Saves up to five different sets of item selections on a per slot 1 thru slot 5 track basis so that any of these can be recalled at will Restore selected track s selected item s Restores a
53. conflict we need to establish a system of priorities This is how it works v By default priority is allocated to the different filters in the order in which they are entered For example in this case our Vocals folder would be assigned the designated color for the test string Vo not that designated for folders y You can change the priorities using the SWS Auto Color context menu commands Up in Priority Filt and Down in Priority Simply right click alten over any filter name and choose whichever vo unnamed of these commands you want Gu Folder children vy Inthe example shown here our folder rule receive has been moved up the list to become the top priority This ensures that all folders will be assigned its designated color regardless of their names or any other consideration In this example right a folder labelled Vocals would take the designated folder color not the designated Vo text color That said you can still change the color of any track in your project manually using the TCP or MCP context menu However clicking the Force button in the Auto Color window Enable auto coloring any raster Up in priority Down in rity Color management Dock 4utocolor in Docker Close Window will again cause the auto color rule to be applied 77 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The
54. criteria and are contained within a folder will take the same color as the parent folder track 6 8 4 SWS Auto Color Actions The following actions are available and can be bound to shortcut keys or assigned to a menu or toolbar SWS Apply auto coloring SWS Toggle auto coloring SWS Open auto color window Note SWS Auto Coloring can also be toggled on and off using the Options Enable SWS Auto Coloring from the main REAPER menu 78 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 6 SWS Color Management 6 9 Color Management Custom Actions The examples of color management custom action macros that follow all stem from one or more of the examples used in the tutorials in this section Study them create them and try them out If you then don t feel you have any need for them you can later delete them The important thing is that you will have developed more experience and understanding in this area This will help you to identify those tasks for which you would find custom actions helpful and give you the confidence to go on to create them Color Folders and Tracks Macros This first macro will have the same effect as working thru the tutorial in Section 6 6 It will assign a different track to each folder then color all child tracks with the same color as their parent folder SWS Select all folders parents only SWS Set selected track s t
55. different kinds of tracks are automatically color coded You can either pull these down from the list on the context menu see right or type the codes in SWS Auto Color Color Oxa6200d Ox808000 Filter yourself i vo au Folder 2 In the example shown here right we have specified 4 that folders are automatically to be colored blue The available filter codes are as follows Their meaning should be mostly self explanatory unnamed Folder children receive kany unnamed unnamed tracks master folder folder tracks children tracks contained within a folder Lp in priority Down in priority Color management enore A Enable auto coloring receive tracks with receives incl busses Bac MAESCRIG GIG DBEkE oc WCOCOOr In WoOcKer any any track not covered by another filter Close Window master colors the master track To apply any of these codes you need to right click over an item in the Filter column of the Auto Color window and then select the code that you require from the context menu 6 8 2 Resolving Color Conflict You might have noticed that one problem with using a color coding system such as this is that conflict and ambiguity can arise For example what if we have a folder track whose name includes the characters Vo Is it to be colored red as specified by the Vo filter or blue as specified by the folder filter In order to resolve such
56. example shown here two of the SWS actions from the Action List have also been added to this menu SWS Set selected item s to color white and SWS Set selected item s to color black Note One limitation at present of the OSX version of the SWS Color Management system is that the actual colors themselves do not show up next to the Set to custom color n commands on the above menu The commands are instead listed without their colors being displayed 67 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 6 2 SWS Color Management Command Summary The table below offers a summary of the main SWS Track and Item Color commands together with a brief explanation Some of these might be a little difficult to understand at first Don t worry all should become more clear after you have worked thru the tutorials Set to one random custom color REAPER s native commands Set Track Item Color to One Random Color selects one color from the literally millions available and applies it to the selected track s or item s The problem here is that you might not like the color it selects The SWS equivalent command varies in one important respect It will always choose one of a set of 16 colors that you have previously defined You ll learn how to create and save color sets Shortly Set to random custom color REAPE
57. eye so take it slowly Tutorial 1 If the file StayWithMe8411 is not still open open it Save it as StayWithMe842 2 With the SWS Snapshots window open select Full SWS Snapshots Mix 1 Let s find out what Poa Date TE New Del Alt click our project would sound like 1 Initial Project 18 03 2010 1 30 PM Filter pees with the volume settings Ful Mel TEEN ik C Track Mix from this mix but the pan aki CO Current Visibility settings from Full Mix 2 custom 3 In the Filter section select Pan C Volume Custom Make sure that Ombe Ces chain Pan is then the only filter sola Sends selected see right C vis _ Selection 4 Make sure that Filter on v Filter on Recall Recall is enabled and that B Selected Tracks Only is nae not enabled Hide New Tracks on Vis Recall 5 Now select Full Mix 2 Notice that only the pan settings from that mix will be recalled the volume lt Hide Options settings will stay as they are The effect is most easily noticed if you use headphones For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 10 EE 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Play the song as you switch between Full Mix 1 and Full Mix 2 Each time you change your snapshot selection the pan settings will change back and forth Now disable the P
58. given keyboard shortcuts and or assigned to an appropriate REAPER toolbar or menu Search the actions list using the phrase sws master for a complete listing Here is a summary of some which you might find interesting Actions Comments Save Master FX enabled state Restore Master F enabled state It is not unusual to need try out different strategies on the master track for example to evaluate which of two compressors you prefer These two actions make it easy or you to switch between alternate scenarios Set master track send 1 thru 5 muted Set master track send 1 thru 5 unmuted Where your sound card has multiple pairs of outlets this set of commands can be used quickly and easily to mute and unmute various sends This for example helps you to compare how your mix sounds thru different speakers or thru headphones Set master volume to 0 dB This one just might save your life The action provides you with a safeguard against the consequence of accidentally raising or lowering the volume of your master output 34 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot 2 7 9 Creating a Cue Bus Track A cue track or cue bus can be used as a quick and easy method of creating a headphone mix that is different from the mix sent to the master track
59. http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 aes Exclusive solo re selected track s or case specified tracks Ovox guit Solo track 8 Disable solo on all others Solo all tracks whose name begins with vox Disable solo on all others Exclusive solo all tracks whose name begins with vox or guit Toggle mute status for currently selected tracks Disable mute status on currently selected tracks Enable mute on all tracks whose name starts drum Toggle mute status m for selected track s m or specified tracks pee eee The Inverted Track Selection feature can be especially useful when used with the m command see Advanced ReaConsole Features M Exclusive mute M upper selected track s or case specified tracks Mvox M3 4 7 Mdru perc a Toggle record arm lower case status for selected track s or specified tracks a a aguitar A Exclusive record arm upper selected track s or case specified tracks Set record input i2 3 Uses s stereo i2 3s increment and m isynth 4m midi as parameters 11 8 1 h Toggle phase status lower case for selected track s or specified tracks H Set exclusive phase upper status for selected case track s or specified tracks Mute all currently selected tracks disable mute on all others Mute all tracks whose name begins with vox disable mute on all others Mute tracks 3 4 and 7 disable m
60. it 2 Use the File SWS Project Management command then Open Projects From List to open the files in the StayWithMeFiles RPL list SWS Project List Open 3 When asked if you wish to Close Active Tabs first see right choose No Close active tabs First 4 The four files in this project will be opened StayWithMe54 RPP will also stay open SS 5 Use the File SWS Project Management Save List of Open Projects command to resave this list All five open project files will now be included in the list 6 Select and display the project StayWithMe54 RPP Make sure the SWS Marker List window is displayed Right click over it and select the option to Dock Marker List in Docker Display in the docker whichever other window you wish e g the Mixer 8 Right click over the Marker List tab in the docker and select Load Vocals to load this marker set Right click again and choose Copy Marker Set to Clipboard 10 Now select the project tab StayWithMe273 RPP 11 Right click over the marker tab and choose Paste Marker Set From Clipboard 12 The markers and regions will be pasted into this project and displayed along its timeline However they have not yet been saved as a set in this project 13 Right click over the Marker List tab choose Save Marker Set type Vocals and press Enter 61 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus
61. iteM acisini sisena neiaie iniedi bia 29 Project Eist CRPE DE nen e nia N 49 project otaona TE a a 50 Project Media Files Window ccccccccccccceceeeeeseeceeeaeeesees 24 project templates load actiONns cccccccecceseetetteeteeeeeeees 36 projects organizing isi a ai aaeain 47 R random custom color rereana e i k 68 Real onol a S 131 ReaConsole commands 2 6 ciaccss ctasciaccine asec 132 ReaC onsole AutoComplete ac sc advices tardies 137 ReaConsole custom Ccommands ccccceeeccseesceeseeeeeeees 137 ReaConsole Folder Child oi eeeccceecesccescescesceeees 137 ReaConsole Inverted Track Selection eee eee 137 REAPER Menu files lt 2 2 2sc2s cc dacencesceeshactcertctntctacitancdneceemes ce 38 REAPER menus CUStOMIZING cccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 26 REAPER Menu Set tiles iirc vielveliviecesnsieeneasbartideisaadacdtanss 38 REAPER preferences and SettingS cccccccccccsscceeeeeeeees 15 REAPERES Actions ICH siiisiccsszordecnseonsecncntiabauneisedoie seveatbens 16 REAPER s menus assigning actions t0 ccccccsseseeeeeeees 16 REAPER s toolbars assigning actions t0 ccceesseeeees 16 receives actions for MANAPING cceccececcceeseeeceeeeeaeeees 34 record input Setran nN 134 PeCOLGINS ACHONS aiaei a 30 Relat dproject Steer N N 49 related 9 6 lt 1 Eei i 49 53 Reorder marker ID Sestssaeana h a oui IRE Order e100 TD Sion to ot Set Sere ac anaes aisle 57 S sam
62. item from say about 50 sec to about 1 min 45 sec With this item still selected and with the zoom action still selected in the action list click on Run not Run Close in S the Actions editor Your view of the project will imee n now zoom in to display just the one section of the selected media item 7 Click on Run again The previous view will be Se et a sl restored Let s now assign a keyboard shortcut Click on the Add button then type to assign this key see right Click on OK Shortcut 8 You can now experiment with selecting any track right clicking and dragging to select any portion of that track then using the key to zoom in and out _ Automatically cloze a on key MIDT input 9 For the purpose of this exercise we can now unassign the key so that it is no longer associated with this action 10 With the action still selected click on the displayed in the box labelled Shortcuts For Selected Action in the lower left corner of the Actions window then click on Delete 11 Now click on Close to close the Actions window 17 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 12 Now select the Actions command from REAPER s main menu and Actions Extensions Help Marquee Them Selection ensure that the item Show Recent eer con ee Actions is selected ticked wf Show
63. item s will follow the default media item color as defined in the current theme for as long as they are selected reverting to any custom color when they are unselected 75 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 6 8 SWS Auto Color A feature recently introduced into the SWS extension pack is the SWS Auto Color window This can be used to ensure that your tracks are automatically color coded according to their track names For example you might specify that you want all Vox tracks to be say red all Guitar tracks green and so on You can have your rules applied to new tracks in new projects as they are created or you can apply them retrospectively to tracks in existing projects The Auto Color feature is easy to use The procedures are as follows SWS Auto Color vy Open the Auto Color window View SWS Filter Auto Color vy Use the Add button to add as many color filters as you want Name each filter and define it s color Use the Apply button to apply your color filters to the tracks in the current project file v Enable the option Enable Auto Coloring if you want your color filters to be automatically applied to other project files as they are created opened or modified Enable auto coloring In this next tutorial you will learn how to use auto coloring at its simplest T
64. law to 6 0db Set selected track s pan law to default 12 13 SWS Actions to Select Tracks SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS Restore saved track selection Save current track selection Select all folder start tracks Select all folders parents only Select all non folders Select armed tracks Select children of selected folder track s Select master track Select muted tracks Select next folder Select only children of selected folders Select only parent s of selected folder track s Select only rec armed track s Select only track 1 thru 32 Select only track s with selected item s Select parent s of selected folder track s Select previous folder Select soloed tracks Select tracks with active routing to selected track s Select tracks with flipped phase Set last touched track to match track selection Toggle invert track selection Toggle master track select Unselect children of selected folder track s Unselect master track 149 SWS_UNMUTERECVS SWS_UNMUTESENDS SWS_UNSETMONMEDIA SWS_PANLAWNEG25 SWS_PANLAWNEG3 SWS_PANLAWNEG45 SWS_PANLAWNEG6 XENAKIOS_SELTRAXPANLAWZERO SWS_PANLAWPOS25 SWS_PANLAWPOS3 SWS_PANLAWPOS45 SWS_PANLAWPOS6 XENAKIOS_SELTRAXPANLAWDEF SWS_RESTORESEL SWS_SAVESEL SWS_SELFOLDSTARTS SWS_SELALLPARENTS SWS_SELNOTFOLDER SWS_SELARMEDTRACKS SWS_SELCHILDREN2 SWS_SELMASTER
65. list Remove a project from a project list Open the project list then close any file s you wish to remove from the project list Use the File SWS Project Management Save List of All Open Projects command to resave the list In this tutorial you will be shown how to Create a project list vy Open the files on a project list v Add files to a project list vy Remove files from a project list Tutorial 1 Start REAPER Close any file that is automatically opened 2 Open the file StayWithMe RPP 3 Choose the command File New Project Tab to create a new project tab then open the file StayWithMe23 RPP 4 Create another new project tab and open the file StayWithMe26 RPP 5 Use the command File SWS Project Management Save List of Open Projects to access the Save Project List dialog box Navigate to whichever directory you wish to use to save the list 6 Inthe File Name box type StayWithMeFiles and click on Save 7 Choose the command File Close All Projects to close all files 8 Choose the command File SWS Project Management Open Projects from List command 9 When the Select Project List dialog box is displayed navigate to the appropriate directory and select StayWithMeFiles RPL then click on Open 10 All three projects will now be opened each in its own tab You can switch from tab to tab and work with any of the three We are now going to add a project to this list 11 Create a new project tab and
66. lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 The table below contains some more examples of possible simple applications for smart markers including the answer to the last example on the previous page These examples by no means exhaust the possibilities Rather they are supplied in order to encourage and help you to think of more ways that you can benefit from using this feature Command IDs Actions Explanation and Comments 140172 16 Markers Go to previous marker Moves play cursor to previous marker project start without stopping playback Track Toggle FX bypass for master Toggles on and off the FX bypass for the track master track This allows any part of the song to be auditioned with the master track FX alternately on and off 1401727 Markers Go to previous marker Moves play cursor to previous marker project start without stopping playback Track Toggle Solo for selected Toggles on and off solo status for currently track s selected track s Allows you to audition a portion of the song allowing you at any time to make any selection of tracks in the TCP their solo status will be toggled each time the play cursor returns to the start of the selection You can change the track selection as often as you wish 140172 40340 Markers Go to previous marker See illustration below Moves play cursor to 40728 8 project start previous marker without stopping playback
67. master M 2 You can however paste avowed calle Snapshot data from one source Vox Bill track to several destination track Simply add the required number of tracks to the destination column and right click to ensure the correct tracks are selected Shown above is this technique being used to copy the same snapshot settings from a vocal track in one project to four vocal tracks in a different project 2 3 vox Mary 4 5 Yox Sue TA cance J ox 121 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 8 6 Exporting and Importing Snapshots A Case Study Here s a real life case study where the ability to export and import snapshots comes into its own In this example we have an album project consisting of some 15 songs with the same drumkit and the same drummer recorded on all 15 The drums folder with its child tracks and nothing else are selected Del Alt click Save Ctrl click S Drums Sean VG BoB o m T ix Fan eth SWS Snapshots B au j 1054 center w 500 00e pme e OOOD 10 Date New Filter C Full Track Mix Current visibility Snare oan o s o B i Show snapshot details O Custom SSS _ e O 00de 20 R i Select tracks in snapshot 4dd selected track s to snapshot Tom L oan o s oO 7 Delete selected track s From snapshot ea j eo 13148 434 i
68. of a media pool as its name implies is to give you a one stop center where you have easy access to those media files that you are likely to use the most both within any particular project and within REAPER in general For example you might have a collection of drum or bass samples that you like to use when you are building your projects You might also have a set of say guitar samples that are suited for use with one particular project In circumstances such as these you are likely to find the SWS Media Pool useful The media pool is used to organize your samples into Groups There are three main types of groups These are as Project Global and Local Project groups are automatically generated by the system The other two are user created and user defined Group Type Explanation The project group displays a list of all media files currently in use in whichever REAPER project is currently open and has focus The number of times each file is used in the project is indicated in the column A Project group is automatically generated when a project is created For example if you work with three projects open in three project tabs and with the SWS Media Pool open then the Project group of the Media Pool will always list the media files for whichever of the three projects currently has focus As you switch between the different project tabs the contents of the Project group in the Media Pool window will change When a user created group is d
69. or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 Index A aDOUL S W Dreineer AAE EOT 37 PCOS ETA E A 15 ACHO LBCEd O monner a 15 acon Marke aen e e a a TEAS 135 ACHON marker oa aa a ee ution 25 ACHONS List Edonon nana e aT 16 Actions Show Action List cccccccccceeecccesescccesesceseeeseeeee 15 Actions Show Actions List cecccccseccccceeesceeeceesene sees 16 ACTIONS SIMP Esana ch cad aad iat nina tetanic geen eed 15 Add Telated Projects oeenn det ee ee 49 arm unarm Selected trackS cccccccccceeeeecceeeesseeesseeeeeeesees 30 assigning actions to REAPER s menus 000000000000000000 16 assigning actions to REAPER s toolbars cceeeeeees 16 assigning actions to the Floating Toolbar ccccee 18 PUTO MS OL OM elit eia taint at hol ei ede Odd Reese 76 Auto Color ACH ODS eeni N 78 Auto Color Color COGS ic scaciaiscecpchcnnutiea tietens Batlaaeentoes 78 Auto Color Filter Codes ccccecccccscsesesceeseeesseeseeeeeees 71 C color COMMMANGS aaea a A a N a J2 Color commands hind ssscistavrcruclteeaceteiehiarnGnormaueadas 68 Color Conflict resOlving cccccssssssesssssssesseeeeeeeseceeeeees 77 color OfaG lent isos erin er eee 68 COLOR Carat iaaa EE 69 Color managemen irinna E E 68 color management custom actionSs sssssseseeeeeeeseeeeeeenn 79 Col r Mana Se Ment mananan ea AT 69 610 6 RE S a E RO 71 color tinting preferent ESen n a 74 Color FOOND AE eu
70. play selected item s Move selected item s left by item length Move selected item s to edit cursor Nudge item contents 1 sample left Nudge item contents 1 sample right Nudge item pitch down Nudge item pitch down resampled A Nudge item pitch down resampled B Nudge item pitch down B Nudge item pitch up Nudge item pitch up resampled A 156 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 12 Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions Nudge item pitch up resampled B Nudge item pitch up B Nudge item positions left beat based Nudge item positions left time based Nudge item positions right beat based Nudge item positions right time based Nudge item volume down Nudge item volume up Nudge master v
71. pool This will insert the item into the currently selected track at the current edit cursor position or Use the keyboard shortcut if you have assigned one This too will insert the item into the currently selected track at the current edit cursor position but see note below Note If you assign a keyboard shortcut to an action for inserting into a project any item from a global group then that shortcut will always behave in the same way For example in the illustration shown on the previous page the keys Alt K will always insert the media file Kick1 wav regardless of which project file is open If however you assign a keyboard shortcut to an action to insert an item from a local media pool folder then that action will only work with that media item when that project is open and has focus When a different project file is in use it is possible that that keystroke combination could insert a different file If you are in doubt about this your safest option is to restrict the use of media pool keyboard shortcuts to items in global groups only 129 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 130 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 10 SWS ReaConsole 10 SWS ReaConsole The SWS ReaConsole is
72. reaper vy Linking directly to the SWS web site for downloads and other information vy Information about the SWS license terms and conditions and so on 2 9 PADRE s LFO Generator PADRE s LFO generator doesn t really fall in the category of little things but this chapter is a handy place to introduce this action SWS PADRE Envelope LFO Generator They can be used to generate an LFO envelope This can be pan volume or mute for selected takes audio or MIDI or any track or FX parameter envelope Simply select the existing media item or envelope mark any required loop or time selection then run the action The dialog box shown on the right will be displayed Settings include Target Selected Track Envelope Selected Take or Selected MIDI Take Segment time selection project or loop LFO Shape including sine triangle square and various saw options Frequency Delay Offset and Strength For MIDI items you should also specify a channel Gutars 7000 Hpg p ne jam 0 0008 center 37 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 Download the latest wersion http jiva standingwaterskudios comireaperisws_extension exe Clase Padre s LFO Generator Target Selected Track Envelope Time selection Active only segment LFO Shape alls Frequency 1 1 saj oo Hz Delay sync off
73. recent actions 13 You can now make any selection of SWS Toggle zoom to sel track s time sel any portion of any media item or he any number of vertically adjacent media items in your project arrangement then use the command SWS Toggle Zoom to Sel Track s from the Actions menu to zoom in and out of that selection 14 Shortly we ll look at how we can add this action to one of REAPER s toolbars Take a break first Wote Keyboard or MIDI Input X If you wanted to assign this or any other action to a button on an installed external control device such as Shortcut MIDI Chan 16 CC 20 Behringer BCR2000 or a Mackie MCU you could do so by iN repeating step 7 above Instead of pressing a key on the computer keyboard you eee should touch the control on the controlling device This Soft takeover absolute mode only causes a message to be displayed similar but almost certainly not identical to that shown on the right LJ Automatically close window on key MIDI input Click OK to confirm your intentions and you can then use the control device to execute this action Tutorial To complete this exercise we are going to add an icon to one of the toolbars for executing this action Full instructions for how to edit the floating toolbar are included in the REAPER User Guide 1 If the floating toolbar is not visible use the View Floating Toolbar command to display it 2 Click on any empty tab on this toolbar
74. selected tracks are visible in both the Arrangement View and the MixerView 14 If you have this button on your floating toolbar click on o ee Set Selected Tracks Height to A Notice the track 5 vinx Mat height is increased Snapshot current track visibility 15 If you have this button on your floating toolbar click on Show all tracks Show all tracks in MCP All tracks will be restored to ane iS Sree nel view in the Mixer oe 16 Now press the key once or twice to restore the track Streuy ome tn PSE heights to normal Show only in TCP ow Show in both MEF and TEF 17 If you have this button on your floating toolbar click on A eee Show all tracks in TCP All tracks will be restored to Filter view in the Arrangement View Invert selection Fide unselected 18 Save the file _ Hide Filtere link TOP ar Dock Track List in Docker 19 Now with your five Vocal tracks still selected right click I ecige anata in the SWS Tracklist window over this selection and choose Invert Selection Right click again and choose Hide Unselected see above right Now all tracks except the vocals are shown see below 1 Yerel B 2 EG A E E 2 1 End 32 Star 2 mi i oe oe ee 0 00 00 rg F 1 44 00 ue Vegova sus tracts 7 Simie eE x a f EE iOi z Name B Guts 2Mat_ B G eGG ee Vocals 1S siiaielaneomes 000 00g Tt omni a fe cele vox Delay 1 No cua
75. settings If you wish volume automation to be included you should put one of the available JS volume plug ins into the track s FX chain and create an envelope to go with it You will then need to also enable the FX Chain as one of your filter options With Mute enabled the mute status of tracks is saved into and can be recalled with the snapshot With Solo enabled the solo status of tracks is saved into and can be recalled with the snapshot With FX Chain enabled the tracks FX Chains are saved into and can be recalled with the snapshot This feature is huge The FX information saved along with the FX Chains themselves includes The list of effects in the chain The bypass offline online status of each effect Any aliases custom names that you have given to any effect in the chain The parameter settings and values of every parameter for every effect in the chain Any automation envelopes that you have created for any parameter on any effect Any track parameter controls that you have created for any effects Any parameter controls that have been assigned to an external device such as a control surface Any parameter modulation that you have set up for any parameter on any effect in the chain There s almost enough there to justify a separate manual for this feature alone We won t be exploring every single one of these possibilities in the tutorials in this chapter but we will work thru a good selection of them
76. settings is in use or by overwriting one of your current snapshot definitions When you do this you need to ensure that you have the correct filters selected When you create and save a new Snapshot with the Custom option selected then only those filters which are currently enabled will be saved into the Snapshot Shown here are the snapshot details for our Delay and Reverb snapshot the only information recorded for each track is its Solo status Del Alt click New Save Ctrl click Filter Full Track Mix Snapshot Details Snapshot 4 Delay and Reverb stored 16 03 2010 3 19 Master 15 tracks solo i Master Track Sala off Track 1 Solo off Track 2 Sala off Track 3 Solo on Track 4 Solo on Track 5 Solo off Track 6 Sala off Track 7 Solo off Track 8 Solo off Vocals Vox Anne vox Delay 1 vox Delay 2 won Mat autars Guitar 1 Mat Guitar 2 Mat Note The contents of any snapshot details window can be selected and copied to be pasted if you wish into a text or similar document outside REAPER Note You would use the same technique as in this section to create Mute settings snapshots simply using the Mute button rather than the Solo button For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Powe
77. that you will need a new track for each item It also remembers that you are only pasting pan settings FX chains and sends 10 Click on OK and your project is there all set up for you You could of course now save this as a new project file Note At present track groups and track group settings are not included with SWS Snapshot data 120 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 8 5 2 The Paste Snapshot Intelligence Before leaving this topic let s take a summary look at how the SWS Paste Snapshot window goes about matching tracks from the source project with tracks in the destination project If both projects have identical track structures with the same track names and track numbers in the same order then of course there will be no problem The software will find a perfect match When a perfect match is not possible the paste snapshot function turns to a set of four rules These rules are listed below in order of the priority with which they will be applied 1 If the track numbers of source tracks match perfectly the numbers of the selected destination tracks then these will be used If not 2 The program will attempt to match tracks by any track ID or track name lt TRACE 83650244 35D4 469EF 9a18 CC1564317946 MAME VWorcals PEAERFCOL 25646136 The ID is an internal BEAT 1 identifier stored
78. then right click over any blank part of this toolbar to open the Customize Menus Toolbars editing interface 3 Click on Retitle then type Zoom Edit see below Click OK Floating toolbar 1 Toolbar 1 a Customized toolbar Default toolbar Edit me F Retitle menu Nem name Zoom Edit eos gt m 18 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot 4 To add an icon click the Add button This causes a list of Actions to be shown very similar to the Actions Editor that you opened earlier 5 Inthe Filter box type sws zoom to limit the list of actions shown In the actions list click on Customize menus toolbars SWS Toggle Zoom to Sel Track s Time Sel Floating toolbar 1 Zoom E dit s eare e li is slightly different from the poe T Rett SMS Toggle zoom to eel tracklel tine sel hide others 6 Click on the Select Close button This action is added Add action to the left pane of the Customize Menus Toolbars Add separator Window Remove Change icon 7 If you wish you can right click over this text and Sau aaa choose either Change Icon to select a graphic icon k for this item or Text Icon to enter a text Cut Ctrl description see right If you choose to enter a text Copy Ctrl C description it will be used as a tooltip for this item FEU Ct
79. three or four takes of perhaps 7 or 8 tracks recorded together Especially wonderful when you are recording multiple takes of drums This series of commands lets you switch quickly and easily between takes while ensuring that the same take is selected for all tracks 2 7 5 Folder Management Using folders in REAPER can be a great aid to your mixing and project management However you might not always find it convenient to be clicking on the track folder icons or dragging and dropping to nest child tracks within a parent folder What s more you might wish to create a folder when you are working in Mixer View A number of actions are available which can help you with this We ll have more to say about these in later chapters but for now it s worth noting that a number of these actions can be quite useful even on their own The Xenakios actions all appear on the bottom of the TCP context menu see next page Any action can of course also be added to your Mixer context menu if you wish These include Actions Comments SWS Make folder from selected tracks or Xenakios SWS Set selected track s as folder You can select any number of adjacent tracks in the TCP or Mixer and run either of these actions The first track in the selection will become the parent folder track the others will be the child tracks The last track in the selection will be the last track in the folder SWS Set selected track s to same folder
80. to understand the various SWS extensions and to get the most from them The sample files used in these tutorials can be downloaded from http www cockos com glazfolk StayWithMe zip If typing this URL note that it is case sensitive After downloading the file you should unzip its contents using a program such as WinZip or ALZip and copy its contents to suitable location on your hard disk About This Guide This user guide is made freely available as a non printable PDF download That doesn t mean that it hasn t cost anything to produce Literally hundreds of hours goes in to the production of a document such as this If you find it useful and would like me to be able to continue to spend the time necessary to keep it up to date and to expand its contents please do the right thing and purchase either a printable PDF edition or purchase a spiral bound hard copy To purchase your authorized PDF or hard copy follow this link http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Contents 1 Setting Up and Getting Started cccccscscscscnsnssssessesenensnsseseesensnsnsceeeeeeeenenensnsneeens 11 Rit SN ED Fk E E AA 11 L2 IOV me SWS I anaa A 12 1 3 Downloading the Sample Project FileS n nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnrnnnenennnnnnnnrnrnnnnnennnnnnne 12 1 4 Installing the SWS ExtenSionS essnsnnsnensnnnsnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnennrnrnrnrnnnenrnnrnnnrnn
81. to your original effects and their parameters You ll find several examples and much discussion about this on the REAPER forums A lot of thought needs to be put into creating freeze and unfreeze macros Your needs may vary for example according to whether or not you have free item positioning enabled whether you are working with multiple takes whether your tracks have been built from different sections of different takes and so on REAPER Preferences General o General settings Keyboard Default render path if lett empty the current project directory if any will be used Project Audio Device MID Devices Masimurn undo memory use 30 megabytes 0 disables undo redo functionality Undo settings Buffering Create undo points for itermtrack selection for time selection Playback When approaching full undo memory keep newest undo states Recording Save undo history with project files in APP UNDO file Allow load of undo history Appearance Store multiple redo paths when possible can use a lot of RAM Media Peak Fal anetare Recent proiect list When you are working with freeze and unfreeze macros your safest option is to enable at least Undo History the following General preferences above Description Time y Save undo history with project file Custom Freeze Tracks in Folder 04708710 09 13 52 Change Track Selection 04 0810 09 13 09 i Unselect All Tracks 0406 10 09 11 46 v Allow load of undo history Sessi
82. window on the label Vocals then hold Shift while you click on Vox Mat Click against any of these items on the black dot to its immediate right in the TCP column These five tracks are now hidden from SWS Tracklist Mame TCP MZF Vocals Vox Anne Mute Salo both the TCP and the MCP 10 Disable the option Link TCP and MCP Vis With the same five tracks still selected in the Tracklist window click in the MCP column for any one of them These five tracks will now be restored to the Mixer view but not to the Track Arrangement view 11 Click in the TCP column for any of the selected tracks They will be restored to the Track view Co Oh iO ee or aa Vox Delay 1 vox Delay 2 Vox Mat autars Guitar 1 Mat Guitar 2 Mat Guitar 1 Anne Guikar 4 Anne thers Harmonica Reverbs VoxVerb Verb Snapshot current track visibility Show all tracks Show SWS Snapshots Rename Show only in MEF Show only in TOP w Show in both MCP and TCP Hide in both MCP and TCP Invert selection Hide unselected 12 Right click over this track selection and from the context menu choose Hide Unselected see Dock Track List in Docker Close Window Clear right Hide Filtered Tracks Link TCP and MCP Vis 85 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 13 Now only the five
83. with m to mute track s SWS Open console with n to name track s SWS Open console with o to solo track s SWS Open console with p to trim pan on track s SWS Open console with v to trim volume on track s SWS Open console with z to suffix track s 138 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 11 More Examples of Custom Actions 11 More Examples of Custom Actions In this final chapter we ll look at some more examples of how some of the SWS and other actions can be chained together to create useful macros As in earlier chapters the main purpose of these examples is to help you to develop your own ideas and to create your own macros If you find that the actual examples used here are useful to you as well well that s a bonus 11 1 FX Management Macros Everybody works with plug ins and FX Take some time to identify those tasks that you find yourself frequently repeating That s where macros might be able to help you Here are some examples 11 1 1 Copy Item FX to Other Items in Track Consider a situation in which a track is made up of a number of media items You might have experimented with creating a chain of FX in one of these items in the example shown below the second item from the left and now you want to copy those effects to all of the other media items on that track 2 Backing Vocal B fs o a TF aa yd 15
84. yo search E Folders Address 9 DAREAPER Audio Projects Demo CD HungryMile tad G0 View Favorites Tools x Picuitar 1 Anne O0 wary E sy Guitar 1 4nne O0 way reapeaks Dib Guitar 1 Mat O0 way ue Guitar 1 Mat 00 waw reapeaks HH Guitar 2 4nne O0 way 3 Guitar 2 4nne 00 way reapeaks Dik Guitar 2 Mat 00 way ty Guitar 2 Mat O0 way reapeaks HungryMile REP 40 Hungry Mile RPP bak Die vocal Anne 00 way 9 vocal 4nne 00 way reapeaks Die vocal Mat 00 wav Folders REAPER Audio Projects Annie and Pete Blue Mosquitos C Dancers Delight Demo CO 9 GetOurOFTown Hungry Mile co LongTimecone 3 StayWithMe 3 whiskey John Hughes 3 Julie Barnes cS Easy 9 TII Be All Smiles O Last Old Shovel D Some Day Martinique 9 Mathew Brady Project ToRaggs g Vocal Mat 00 wav reapeaks H vocal Mat 01 way g Vocal Mat 01 way reapeaks Size 34 957 KB 340 KB 34 957 KB 340 KB 34 957 KB 340 KB 34 957 KB 340 EB 21 KB 20 KB 30 904 KB 300 KB 10 039 KB 96 KB 25 007 KB ul KB Type Wave Sound REAPER Peaks File Wave Sound REAPER Peaks File Wave Sound REAPER Peaks File Wave Sound REAPER Peaks File REAPER Project REGPER Backup Wave Sound REAPER Peaks File Wave Sound REAPER Peaks File Wave Sound REAPER Peaks File Date Modified 42 2009 11 18 AM 4 12 2009 11 18 AM 4 12 2009 11 18 AM 4122009 11 18 4M 4122009 11 18 4M 42 2009 11 18 AM 42 200
85. you dozens and dozens of examples of ways in which these extensions can be applied to enhance your REAPER experience You should think of these as being your first steps into this world You should also develop the knowledge and confidence to go on from there to grow in knowledge and take whatever further steps will benefit you the most You see that s the thing about customization By definition it will be different for everyone That s mighty powerful but with power comes responsibility In this case each and every one of us has to take responsibility for how we as individuals want REAPER to work Thank you to Anne Parsell and Mathew Woolley Tasmania s very own Twice Bitten for their permission to use their song Stay With Me for the sample exercises and tutorials I d like to acknowledge here of course the work of Justin Christophe Schwa and all others who have helped make REAPER what it is I d also like to especially acknowledge the work of Tim Payne at Standing Water Studios and Xenakios for their incredible efforts in developing these extension sets Also a special mention for Jean Francois Bedague from the REAPER forum Jeffos for his work on the SWS SM extensions and actions and to Pascal Bourdon Padre for his contributions including an LFO generator Last but definitely by no means least a huge thank you to Spike Mullings for the many painstaking hours he has spent tracking down and correcting my numerous typos Geoffrey
86. 1 8 4 6 In this section we will look at how you can delete tracks from existing snapshot definitions To do this you simply follow this sequence Tutorial 6 Deleting Tracks from Snapshots v Inthe Snapshots window select the snapshot v In either the TCP or the MCP select the track s to be deleted v Right click over the snapshot name and choose Delete Selected Track s from Snapshot It is important to understand that what you are doing here is deleting from the snapshot any and all information about track settings that may be stored in that snapshot such as volume and pan settings FX chain etc The track of course will remain in the project file It will still appear and it will still play whenever this snapshot is selected It is simply that choosing this particular snapshot will no longer result in any settings for that track being recalled As usual an example might make this clearer Tutorial In this example we will first delete some tracks from a snapshot and then import settings for those tracks from another snapshot then modify them and save the changes 1 If the file StayWithMe845 is not still open open it Save it as StayWithMe846 Open the SWS Snapshots window and make sure Full Track Mix is selected in the Filter column 2 Select the snapshot Full Mix 3 We are going to delete the Others folder and its child harmonica tracks from this snapshot 3 Inthe TCP or MCP select the Others folder and the two Harmoni
87. 13 Now double click on Full Project Min in the Screen Sets window Suddenly all tracks are restored to view in the MCP This is because REAPER s native commands do not recognize the option to hide the same tracks in both the TCP and the MCP at the same time The solution 14 Click again on Guitars Only in your Snapshots window Now once again only the Guitar tracks are shown in both the TCP and the MCP while the track heights in the TCP remain minimized and the whole project length is still visible 15 Double click in the Screen Sets window on 30 secs with VUs The track height is increased and you will be zoomed horizontally to just 30 seconds display but all tracks will again be restored to the MCP 16 Click once more on Guitars Only in the Snapshots window if you wish to fix this 17 Play around with switching between your Track screen sets and visibility snapshots until you get the hang of this 18 When finished choose the screen set Full Project Min and the snapshot Show All 19 Save the file Note Just in case you re wondering we haven t yet discussed how you modify or even delete a track visibility screen set Worry not We ll get to that in Chapter 8 7 8 Visibility Snapshots and Project Changes There s one important issue that can arise with visibility snapshots and which needs to be mentioned here If you add tracks to a project after you have created any visibility snapshots then by default those tracks will
88. 3 14 15 16 Ly 18 If the file StayWithMe101 is not still open open it Save it as StayWithMe102 Select the snapshot Full Mix 2 Extra Reverb For the purpose of this example loop the area from approx 2 min 20 sec to 3 min 36 sec and commence playback Display ReaConsole To hear only the main vocal tracks type 01 2 5 Ctrl Enter Now to hear also the delayed vocals type 03 4 Ctri Enter To toggle the delay tracks on and off press Ctri Enter several times With all five vocal tracks displayed type ovoxverb Ctri Enter You should now hear the vocal tracks with reverb added Now type f Ctrl Enter This will toggle FX enable on and off Press Ctrl Enter several times to compare how the vocals sound with and without their track FX Make your FX enabled when you have finished SWS ReaConsole dong this bquit Acoustic Let s Now Suppose we just want to hear the vocal Name 6 Guitars 7 Guitar 1 Mat Guitar 2 Mat 9 Guitar 1 delay on its own Type O3 4 followed by Anne 10 Guitar 2 Anne with prefix Acoustic Ctrl Enter Let s lower the volume on these delay tracks Type v3 4 2 then Ctrl Enter Now to remove solo all together type o followed by Ctri Enter Let s say we like this mix Press Esc to close ReaConsole In the Snapshots window hold Ctrl while clicking on Full Mix 2 Extra Reverb Right click over the name and rename it Full Mix 2 Extra Reverb Less Delay Now let s try something else Open
89. 39 11 1 1 Copy Item FX to Other Items in Track ssnnnnnnnnunununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnenennnnrnnnnnrnnnrnnennrnnennnnne 139 11 1 2 Toggle FX Bypass of Selected Folders plus Children s sssessnsssssnsrsnnsrnrensrnernsrnnnnrnennennenne 139 LLL SGV al FA Eypass TOOG stisisisissetessorseierrmaeaneacsiiieiitiennnnin eee 140 11 2 Track eee eee Mia Sci risers rien 141 A RO ce a oe oat ig a Gao een nee ee ee ene ee ee 141 11 2 2 Unfreeze Trage in Folder sossccciirisinisnrinronaioininoninisirsrren edn se eeatacaceseecsuateecce es 142 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions ssscssessseseeees 143 ToLo he Chad ee ges g a dye Bet a eE ne On nn nee ee seer eRe 143 Lo soe oe Waly Ur oF ar a g nee en ener AATE ee eee A ne eee rene 144 PA e ee a Ea E E E ees sane tue reed eee eee 145 Lona Ce FOC AOIC NS aAA EN 145 Me st roped cna O E E E E T T 145 12 6 SWS Freeze Unfreeze ACtiOnS s ssesssnnununnunnunnnnnnnunnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne nunnu nne 146 127 SWS Folder Manipulation ACHOS aster thn nediecentnckccusitadececaarcedacessaniaese a se eee 146 B eRe aye a yc Meee ene Pen Re meen PEA A ene ae AEEA earn ae ener ern e ty rere rarer TE eros 147 12 9 SW tom CeO in NANa daa NNN R teens 147 12 10 SWS PADRE Envelope Processor and LFO Gererator cccscsecsececsecneeesecseonenensesnensesnerenanses 147 U SaS Proe Er 2 ee een ae ier ee 148 12 12 SWS Track Parameter ACtiONS ccc
90. 4 03 2010 5 Full Track Mix 2 kauae i Master 15 tracks visibility 1032010 erat ai This tool tip feature is not currently available for OSX users 95 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 8 2 The Options Panel The options panel at first sight might not look like anything special but understanding how to use this is the main key to getting the best out of your SWS mixing snapshots It will take a little time and some practice before you really get on top of it the examples that follow in this chapter have been designed to help you to do this Meanwhile the summary table below will prove to be a useful reference point for you even if you don t quite understand it all just yet With one or two exceptions such as the button labelled New and the option Prompt for Name most of the items in this panel can be used for two important purposes v To decide which particular track characteristics are included when a snapshot is saved and which are not For example in Chapter 7 we created some snapshots which were visibility only This ensures that when one of those snapshots is recalled its track visibility settings will be restored but anything else that may have changed such as track volume or pan settings will be left as they are now and will not be restored to their
91. 44 sec and press Ctri 2 to create a marker numbered 2 3 Position the cursor at about 2 min 21 sec and press Ctri 3 to create a marker numbered 3 4 Position the cursor at about 2 min 58 sec and press Ctri 4 to create a marker numbered 4 5 Double click on the numbered flag for marker 2 This om Edit Marker lets you edit the properties for this marker Name 40163 6 Inthe Name box type 40163 see right then press T Enter The Indicated that this will be an action VE Position 1 43 43 ID 4 marker 40163 represents the action Go to Marker aka 3 P ak 7 Double click on the numbered flag for marker 4 In the Name box type 40161 the command ID for Go to Marker 1 and press Enter 8 Press 1 to move the play cursor to marker 1 Press Space to commence playback Play will continuously roll from marker 1 to marker 2 then marker 1 to marker 2 until you stop playback 9 Now we are going to customize the ruler s context menu to enable us to turn smart action markers on and off 10 From the main REAPER menu choose the Options Customize Menus Toolbars command This opens the Customize Menus Toolbars window 11 From the drop down list top left choose Ruler arrange context as shown below 12 Customize menus toolbars Auler arange context ka Include default menu as submenu Customized menu ELITE Default menu tRemove selection Aemove selection oom selection Fi oom select
92. 5 Load track template 06 Load track template 07 menakios Sw S enaking SWS Load track template 08 Load track template 09 menakios S S Load track template 10 Shortcuts for selected action Import esport Custom actions Mew Take a look at the screen shot above This shows a number of actions which can be used for loading any of up to ten different project templates and ten different track templates The trick is to include your required number at the start of the template name 01 02 03 etc This can be wonderful time saver when you are project building For example suppose you have created a drums folder complete with all its child tracks snare kick toms cymbals etc set up exactly as you like them perhaps with panning FX routing to a reverb track etc all in place armed for recording with inputs assigned and so on You can save that to a track template called say 01 Drums and then assign a shortcut key to the action Load track template 01 Hey presto For future projects just press the shortcut key and your drum tracks are automatically set up for you What s more you are not limited to just 10 of each Whenever REAPER is launched the SWS extensions automatically searches its templates folder for additional templates numbered up to 99 If it finds any these are automatically added to the Actions list 2 7 11 Two more actions worth a special mention are these Time Selection Cut Copy Paste A
93. 9 11 18 AM 412 2009 11 18 4M 4 12 2009 2 53 PM 4 12 2009 2 49 PM 42 2009 2 53 PM 4 12 2009 2 53 PM 4 12 2009 2 44 PM 4 12 2009 2 44 PM 4 12 2009 2 48 PM 42 2009 2 46 PM Over the page is shown another example of when you might wish to manage and keep tabs on a number of project files as a group In this case we have several different versions of the same project In fact it is the sample project that we have been using for the exercises in this User Guide 47 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 O D WREAPER Audio Projects StayWithMe File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ta Search Folders e02 vocal Anne glued 100212_2123 0qg Lf Stay 02 Vocal 4nne render 001 0gg ed Shay O2 Vocal Anne render 001 0gq reapeaks e Stay 02 vocal Anne ogg kej Stay 02 Yocal Anne ogg reapeaks l Stay 05 Yocal Mat ogg a Stay 05 Vocal Mat ogg reapeaks die Stay 07 Guitar 1 Mat ogg I Stay 07 Guitar 1 Mat ogg reapeaks fis Stay 08 Guitar 2 Mat ogg ep Stay 08 Guitar 2 Mat ogg reapeaks lb Stay 09 Guitar 1 nne ogg Wy Skay 09 Guitar 1 Anne ogg reapeaks ie Stay 10 Guitar 2 4nne a0gg oy Skay 10 Guitar 2 4nne ogg reapeaks Lie Stay 11 Harmonica agg ey Stay 11 Harmonica ogg reapeaks Other Places 9 REAPER Audio Projects i My Documents 9 Shared Documents i My Computer My
94. D 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Item Unselect all items Track Set all FX offline for selected tracks Track Toggle FX bypass of selected track s SWS Restore saved track selection Most of these actions are fairly self explanatory The action Track Toggle FX bypass of selected track s is not strictly necessary as all individual effects within these tracks will have already been set off line However by also setting the tracks themselves to FX bypass you provide a visual reminder red FX button that these tracks have been frozen 11 2 2 Unfreeze Tracks in Folder This macro effectively reverses the previous macro SWS Save current track selection SWS Select only children of selected folder track s Item Select all items in selected tracks SWS Select only track s with items Take Delete active take from items Item Unselect all items Track Set all FX online for selected tracks Track Toggle FX bypass of selected track s SWS Restore saved track selection If you included the optional action Track Toggle FX bypass of selected track s in the freeze macro then you should also include it in the unfreeze macro Tutorial 1 Open the file StayWithMe102 and save it as StayWithMe112 2 Create the freeze and unfreeze macros shown above Add them both to your Actions menu 3 Select the Vocals folder the Guitars folder and the Others harmonicas folder Rendering file 4 Run your fre
95. Francis April 2010 SWS Web Resources In order to access the SWS Extensions you will need to visit the Standing Water Studios web site located at http www standingwaterstudios com Download details can be found in Section 1 2 There is just one point I would like to make here These extensions which are generously made freely available to you represent the product of literally hundreds and hundreds of hours of work by the developers They are made freely available but this does not mean they cost nothing to produce Next to the download links you will see a Donate button If you re not sure how much to give try 10 It won t hurt you really Contributions from Developers Most Welcome Contributions to the SWS Extension pack in the form of coded extensions by other developers are also strongly encouraged and welcomed In many respects these are even more welcome than cash If you think you might be interested please contact tim standingwaterstudios com Bug Reporting and Feature Requests If you come across any suspected bugs in any of the extensions or wish to make a feature request please do so on the official site not on the REAPER forum This URL will take you to the corrects site http code google com p sws extension This URL will take you to the SWS tracker http code google com p sws extension issues list Sample Project Files This User Guide includes a number of examples and step by step tutorials designed to help you
96. HILDREN SWS_BLACKTRACK SWS_WHITETRACK SWS_TRACKCUSTCOL1 SWS_TRACKCUSTCOL16 SWS_COLTRACKNEXTCUST SWS_COLTRACKNEXT SWS_TRACKRANDCOL SWS_TRACKORDCOL SWS_COLTRACKPREV SWS_TRACKRANDCOLS SWS_CUSTOMCOLALL SWS_RANDOMCOLALL SWS_TRACKGRAD SWS_RECREDRULER SWSCONSOLEEDITCUST SWSCONSOLE SWSCONSOLE2 SWSCONSOLEMARKER SWSCONSOLEARM SWSCONSOLEPREFIX SWSCONSOLECOLOR SWSCONSOLEFX SWSCONSOLEPHASE SWSCONSOLEINPUT SWSCONSOLECHAN SWSCONSOLEMUTE SWSCONSOLENAME SWSCONSOLESOLO SWSCONSOLEPAN SWSCONSOLEPANT SWSCONSOLEEXSEL SWSCONSOLEVOL SWSCONSOLEVOLT SWSCONSOLESUFFIX For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions 12 3 SWS Marker Actions SWS Disable marker actions SWS Enable marker actions SWS Nudge marker under cursor left SWS Nudge marker under cursor right SWS Run action marker under cursor SWS Toggle marker actions enable SWS Copy marker set to clipboard SWS Copy markers in time selection to clipboard relative to selection start SWS Delete all markers SWS Delete all regions SWS Delete marker set SWS Export formatted marker list to clipboard SWS Exported marker list format SWS Load marker set SWS Open marker list SWS Paste marker set from clipboard SWS Renumber marker IDs SWS Renumber region IDs SWS Save marker set SWS Select next region SWS Select previou
97. Network Places Details Stay WithMe File Folder Date Modified Today 2 March 2010 7 55 AM A P Stay WithMe 3 RPP 4 Stay WithMe23 RPP bak Stay withMe26 RPP eo Stay WithMe26 RPP bak Stay withMe273 RPP em Stay WithMe273 RPP bak StaywithMe RPP P pay withMte RPP bak Type RESPER Project File Date Modified 15 02 2010 2 51 PM Size 27 5 KB In this case all of the project files are stored in the same folder essentially because they all use the same media in this case OGG files Currently there are four different versions of the Stay With Me project file This is the example that we will be using in the tutorials in this chapter 4 2 SWS Project Management Commands Brady s Song modified REAPER v3 34pre6 Edit View Track Options Insert Actions Extensions Help Ctrl h Chrl 0 Cbrl 5 Ctrl Alk s Mew project Open project Save project Save project as Project templates Recent projects Ctrl Alt h Ctrl F4 New project tab Close project Close all projects Save all projects Remove Track Selection 0 27 00 0 54 00 SS Project management Eo Save list of open projects Open projects From list Add related project s Delete related project SS Projpect List Alk Enter Ctrl AlE R Project settings Render Show render queue Save live output to disk bounce Ctrl 4lk 6 Consolidate Export tracks Export project MIDI
98. PLACES l reaper ini E Desktop sws_mediapool txt i tim gt E TrackTemplates gM Applications vy m UserPlugins PS Documents lal reaper_sws dylib gt i SyncServices Jun 15 2009 8 59 PM l Xcode Jun 23 2009 1 02 PM re ae q OSX B Users A tim Library 9 Application Suppor REAPER 9 UserPlugins 5W5_05X Mar 6 2010 6 05 PM Mar 6 2010 5 27 PM Mar 6 2010 6 02 PM Mar 6 2010 6 05 PM Jun 16 2009 12 17 AN Oct 31 2009 6 57 PM Mar 7 2010 10 27 AM SEARCH FOR 4 Today LEI x Bric 1 of 76 selected 20 08 GB available ee If you are using a Mac OSX then your installation package will consist of two files license txt and reaper_sws dylib If you accept the terms and conditions explained in the license text file then to install the SWS extensions you should copy or drag and drop the reaper_sws dylib file into the folder Library Application Support REAPER UserPlugins 13 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 1 5 REAPER Actions Keymaps and Custom Menus In the course of working thru the many tutorials that are included with this User Guide you will probably wish to experiment with setting up various keyboard shortcuts and changes to your toolbars and menus to accommodate many of the SWS commands and actions If you wish t
99. R s native commands Set Track Item Color to Random Colors selects for each track or item in the selection one of the literally millions of different colors available The problem here is that you might not like some of the color it selects The SWS equivalent command varies in one important respect It will always choose its colors from a set of 16 colors that you have previously defined You ll learn how to create and save these color sets shortly Set to color gradient This ingenious command defies description other than in the context of an actual example which we ll get to shortly Two colors that you have previously selected are applied to the first and last items or tracks in the selection For the items or tracks in between these two the colors are gradually morphed from the first color to the last in a series of steps Set to ordered custom colors Sets the color for each item or track in the current section in sequence to one of the 16 colors in your current color set Set to ordered custom colors per This command can be applied only to to media items and when track the selected media items are spread across two or more tracks It sets the color for each item in the selection sequentially to one of the 16 colors in your current color set starting with color 1 for the first item on each track Set children to same color This command is on the TCP context menu but not the media item context menu If you apply this command with
100. REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions by Geoffrey Francis Version 1 7 1 April 2010 This guide will be updated regularly as the software itself is further improved and developed Check for updates and other information at http www standingwaterstudios com This document has been produced compiled and rendered to PDF format using the wonderful OpenOffice Writer software For more information about OpenOffice go to http www openoffice org April 2010 ReaRead REAPER books and training manuals printed and spiral bound are now available from http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 Up and Running A REAPER User Guide The essential and definitive guide to recording editing and mixing with REAPER Now fully updated for version 3 0 Includes sample project files and step by step examples to help you learn how to use the many features of REAPER Includes special sections on key REAPER features such as routing and audio channel splitting as well as numerous examples of how to use and apply many of the supplied FX plug ins Up and Running is not only a comprehensive guide to using REAPER it s also full of an amazing amount of information on audio recording and engineering I simply cannot recommend it enough Justin Frankel COCKOS Inc and REAPER Developer ReaMix Breaking the Barriers with REAPER This book does much more than just teaching you how to use basic tools such as volume panning EQ gates
101. S Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Set master track send 1 thru 5 unmuted Set master volume to 0dB Set selected track as reference track Set selected track s as folder Set selected track s height s to A Set selected track s height s to B Set selected track s record armed Set selected track s record unarmed Set volume of selected track s to 0 0dB Set volume of selected item s Store selected track s heights Toggle master track send 1 thru 5 mute Toggle reference track Toggle selected track s height A B Toggle selected track s visible in mixer Toggle visibility of selected folder parent s children in mixer Un bypass FX of selected track s Unselect tracks with BUSS in name 12 23 Xenakios SWS Media Item Management Create markers from selected item s name by take source file name Delete selected item and send active take s source media to recycle bin Delete selected item and source media immediately Display item peak gain s Erase from item beat based Erase from item time based Explode selected item s to new tracks keeping positions Find missing media for project s takes Implode items to takes and pan symmetrically Implode selected item s in place Invert item selection Loop and
102. SELONTRACK SWS_SAVETIME1 SWS_SAVETIMES SWS_SELWITHSTATE SWS_INDENT SWS_MAKEFOLDER SWS_MUTECHILDREN SWS_COLLAPSE SWS_FOLDSMALL SWS_UNCOLLAPSE SWS_FOLDERPREV SWS_TOGMUTECHILDRN SWS_UNINDENT SWS_UNMUTECHILDREN For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions 12 8 SWS Item Actions SWS Delete all items on selected track s SWS Insert file matching selected track s name SWS Loop section of selected item s SWS Move selected item s left edge to edit cursor SWS Move selected item s right edge to edit cursor SWS Toggle mute of items on selected track s SWS Move cursor to item peak amplitude SWS Nudge item s position 1 sample left SWS Nudge item s position 1 sample right 12 9 SWS Item Selection SWS Add item s to left of selected item s to selection SWS Add item s to right of selected item s to selection SWS Select locked items SWS Select locked items on selected track s SWS Select lower leftmost item on selected track s SWS Select muted items SWS Select muted items on selected track s SWS Select next item across tracks SWS Select next item keeping current selection across tracks SWS Select previous item across tracks SWS Select previous item keeping current selection across tracks SWS Select upper leftmost item on selected track s SWS
103. Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot In this chapter you will be introduced to some of the simplest of the SWS extension actions In doing this the objectives are that v You should come to appreciate that even the simplest of actions can be deceptively useful v The real potential of SWS actions often becomes evident when you collect together a number of them into a group v If you have not already done so you will learn how to assign simple actions to REAPER s custom toolbars and menus 2 1 Preferences and Settings As you are no doubt aware REAPER s exact behavior will often be in part determined by your options and preferences settings To ensure that the examples that follow will work successfully please ensure that the following options are set as specified in the table below Option Required Setting Options menu Loop points linked to time Set this option Off unticked selection Options Preferences Editing Behavior Set Select both time and items when using right click Mouse marquee to On ticked 2 2 What Are REAPER and SWS Actions An action is basically a command that can be executed in REAPER Whether you are aware of it are not you use actions every time you use REAPER For example every time you press Ctrl S or use the File Save command or click on the Save icon on the REAPER toolbar you are executing an action In this case the action is that of saving your project file I
104. Snapshots Toggle visibility of selected Folder parent s children in mixer Extensions Track Mixer Envelopes Many of these only really make sense when they are incorporated with other commands into macros For example it is unlikely that you would normally want to go to this menu to Bypass FX of selected track s when you can do this by simply clicking the FX bypass button of any track in a selection We ll come to examples of useful macros which include actions such as these later However there are some actions here that you might well find useful in their own right Remember that you can of course assign keyboard shortcuts for these They include Actions Comments Reset volume and pan of selected track s Sets volume to 0 dB and pan to center on selected tracks Set volume of selected track s to 0 0 dB Returns volume of selected track s to 0 0 dB Pan selected track s to center Restores selected tracks s to default pan position Store Recall selected track s heights These actions together allow preferred heights to be stored and recalled for any track s 33 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 2 7 7 Managing Sends and Receives REAPER s Routing Matrix is an effective and flexible environment for managing most of your routing needs not
105. Toggle selection of items on selected track s SWS Unselect all items on selected track s SWS Unselect items without render in source filename SWS Unselect items without stems in source filename SWS Unselect upper leftmost item on selected track s SWS_DELALLITEMS SWS_INSERTFROMTN SWS_LOOPITEMSECTION SWS_ITEMLEFTTOCUR SWS_ITEMRIGHTTOCUR SWS_TOGITEMMUTE SWS_FINDITEMPEAK SWS_NUDGESAMPLELEFT SWS_NUDGESAMPLERIGHT SWS_ADDLEFTITEM SWS_ADDRIGHTITEM SWS_SELLOCKITEMS SWS_SELLOCKITEMS2 SWS_SELLLI SWS_SELMUTEDITEMS SWS_SELMUTEDITEMS2 SWS_SELNEXTITEM SWS_SELNEXTITEM2 SWS_SELPREVITEM SWS_SELPREVITEM2 SWS_SELULI SWS_TOGITEMSEL SWS_UNSELONTRACKS SWS_UNSELNOTRENDER SWS_UNSELNOTSTEM SWS_UNSELULI 12 10 SWS PADRE Envelope Processor and LFO Generator SWS PADRE Envelope LFO Generator SWS PADRE Envelope Processor Selected Track SWS PADRE Shrink Selected Items 1024 samples SWS PADRE Shrink Selected Items 128 samples SWS PADRE Shrink Selected Items 2048 samples SWS PADRE Shrink Selected Items 256 samples SWS PADRE Shrink Selected Items 512 samples 147 PADRE_ENVLFO PADRE_TRACKENVPROC PADRE_SHRINK_1024 PADRE_SHRINK_128 PADRE_SHRINK_2048 PADRE_SHRINK_256 PADRE_SHRINK_512 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 12 1 SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS
106. Visibility When prompted for a snapshot name type Guitars Only and press Enter see right Enter Snapshot Name Guitars Only 7 Right click over the SWS Tracklist window area and choose Show All All tracks are now restored to view 8 Still in the Tracklist window select the Vocals folder and its four child tracks Hold Ctri Alt while clicking on any MCP or TCP dot in this selection Only vocal tracks will now be displayed 9 Right click again over the selection and choose Snapshot Current Track Visibility When prompted type Vocals Only and press Enter 10 Right click in the Tracklist window area and choose Show All All tracks are now restored to view 11 Disable the option Link TCP and MCP Vis 12 Still in the Tracklist Window select the Reverb folder and its two tracks Hold Ctri Alt while you click on any TCP dot in the selection These should now be the only tracks visible in the TCP but all tracks should still be displayed in the MCP 13 Right click again over the selection and choose Snapshot Current Track Visibility When prompted type Reverb and press Enter 14 Restore all tracks to view Right click over any track name and choose Snapshot Current Track Visibility When prompted type All Tracks and press Enter ows Tracklist Vox Anne Vox Delay 1 vox Delay 2 wox Mat Gubars Guitar 1 Mat Guitar 2 Mat F Snapshot current track visibility Recall snapshot Guitars Only Recall s
107. XLCMS IONS iba aunnsacn A r ai 11 SWS Extensions imstal ling oricine 13 VV Sse ta COl ee en EEA E A 67 SWS Marker Cistern Puadalodyledaedeem atone 53 SWS M rker Utilities o oo 55 SW SME CIA Pooliresie need vinta cbonnitoa micnetne 125 SWS Project List WindOW 2 0 s sss sssss00 0000000000000000ee 49 52 SWS ReaConso lescut ia N E 131 SWS Tracklist MINACE enari E 81 T Take Wb lt r cee ne ene tree E ne noon ne ea cee EO 31 takes actions for MANAGING eeeseeeeeeeeeeseessee ees 31 TCP Context INCU 5 55 ccsstc crs N 119 time selection ACHONS asserere eta Ea 20 timeselection ent COPY e cee eel 36 Toggle Ruler red while recording c cccceeeeeseeeeeeseseeeees 30 TOG Cle selecttrackS ariaa e aee 133 TOO DAES CUSTO T ATA 15 PACK CO OM ana i iesoaseiesaiecue sci ecaeeasoes 135 Track freeze IMACTOSa5 econ a eee 141 Tack list TOPMAL aeniea an A eats 57 track maangeMent ACtIONS cccccccseseeccceeeseeeeeeeaeeeees 33 track tmailas Cimon ese Geeta ce sane ea elena 81 track Naime add Prefix edee E EO E aa a in 135 track iame add sufix ea a a 135 tack Mame Seleena N 135 Track Selection Nyereren wieesieacesoacesietesasent 82 mack alotin See NON TON 29 track templates load actiONs ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 Track MMTCOZS MACOS taisaiiincncre acta ere ceta fee EEEE 141 Track View sereen SOUS wife ier eea ae 81 Track View Screech SCtS 22 22 00 ee sae ee ee 89 Track visibility snapShots
108. a Copying pasting exporting SWSSnap file and importing snapshot data is done via the Snapshot Import Snapshot Opens the Snapshot Paste window for Paste window you to import snapshot data from a re l Later in this chapter you ll previously saved SWSSnap file find a tutorial that steps you New Snapshot Creates a new snapshot thru this Paste Snapshot Opens the Snapshot Paste window for you to copy data from the clipboard into the current project Dock Snapshots in Docker Toggles the docked status of the Snapshots window Close Window Closes the window The Snapshots List Context Menu when right clicking over empty area Recall existing snapshot There will be one Recall command for each snapshot e g in the sample project file Recall Guitars Only Recall Vocals Only etc Import Snapshot These commands have the same effects Recall Guitars Only and serve the same purposes as listed y Recall vocals Only New Snapshot above Recall Reverb Ls Recall All Tracks Paste Snapshot Import snapshot New snapshot Paste snapshot Dock Snapshots in Docker Dock Snapshots in Docker Close Window Close Window In addition to the above PC users can obtain a brief overview of the contents of any Snapshot by hovering the mouse over the snapshot name see right This causes a tool tip to be displayed Snapshots Del Alt click Save Ctrl click Mame Date Me 4 All a 14032010 Filter 1 tuika nly 1
109. a folder selected then the child tracks in that folder will be set to the same color as the folder Set to custom color 1 thru 16 Sets the selected track s or media item s to one of the 16 colors in the current color set Color management Opens the SWS Color Management interface used for creating and managing color sets and color gradients 68 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 6 SWS Color Management 6 3 Available Color Management Actions Please refer to the final chapter of this User Guide Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions for a list of assignable actions in this category Preparation Before exploring the SWS color management features we are going to modify one of our existing project files to make it ready for this purpose 1 Open the file StayWithMe54 RPP and immediately save it as StayWithMe63 RPP 2 Click on any track in the Track Control Panel then press CtrI A to select all tracks 3 Right click over any track number in the TCP and choose Set Track Color to Default This will remove the existing track colors 4 Save the file 6 4 Color Gradients To use the SWS color gradient feature you should follow this process vy Choose the Color Management command from the SWS Track Color or Item Color menu v Define the gradient start and end colors vy Close the Color Management window vy Select t
110. acks When enabled this toggle causes all tracks not selected by the filter text to be hidden from view When disabled these tracks are still visible Snapshot Current Visibility Invert selection Unselects all tracks currently selected selects all tracks currently not selected Hide Unselected Hides all unselected tracks Dock Track List in Docker Toggles the docked status of the Tracklist window 82 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 7 SWS Tracklist and Track Management 7 2 SWS Tracklist Column Management If you re starting to think that there s more to the SWS Tracklist then meets SWS Tracklist the eye then you d not be wrong For example the column header area has a few surprises in its context menu iwi In addition to the default columns shown you can also display any or all of ee the following columns yw TCR Arm Sw MCP Mute al i Mute Solo Salo When these columns are displayed you are able to record arm mute or solo Reset any track or any track selection from within the SWS Tracklist window Wwe PTSD You can also sort the track list display using any column as your sort key Click once on any column header for an ascending sort click again for a reverse sort For example click once on the Name header to sort Sse eran your track list but not the tracks themselves in E alphabetical order from A to Z Cl
111. ad track template 01 thru 10 154 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions 12 22 Xenakios SWS Track Folder and Master Track Management Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Apply track FX to items mono and reset volume Apply track FX to items and reset volume Auto rename selected takes Bypass FX of selected track s Create new tracks Dismantle selected folder Give track s default label Insert new track at the top of track list Insert prefix to track label s Insert suffix to track label s Maximize selected track s fx panel height in mixer Minimize selected track s send amp fx panel height in mixer Minimize selected track s send panel height in mixer Nudge volume of selected track s down Nudge volume of sele
112. ameters which can then be passed to various commands Some examples of how these parameters work are summarized below A tutorial follows shortly Parameter Group Comments Fades Configurations A and B You can define two separate sets A and B of fades each with their own fade in and fade out time and shape The shapes numbered 0 to 5 follow the six shapes shown in the Options Preferences Project Defaults window The Action List includes actions which allow you to apply either of these defined fades to any item or selection of items 22 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot Parameter Group Comments Nudges Various parameters can be entered which allow you to define the length of nudges in seconds or beats item position semitones pitch decibels volume or pixels or seconds edit cursor position The Action List includes a series of actions which lets you apply these nudges as required Tracks Two different track height parameters A and B can be defined as can a default label and a label suffix and prefix Actions are included which can be used to change the height and or label of any track or tracks using these parameters Tutorial 1 Make sure that you have the file StayWithMe23 open 2 Choose the Extensions Command Parameters comm
113. an filter and enable the Volume filter Now as you switch between the two snapshots the pan levels will remain constant but the volume will change Now enable both the Volume filter and the Pan filter As you switch back and forth both pan and volume levels will once again change Save the file Now let s build on that to bring another factor into our snapshots We are going to introduce a filter solo snapshot into our model Make sure that Filter on Recall is enabled Select the Initial Project snapshot Make sure that the only filters enabled is Solo Click on the New button to create another new snapshot Call this Delay and Reverb We can use this to check on how much delay and reverb has been added to our two full mixes With the new Delay and Reverb mix selected Solo the two Vox Delay tracks and the reverb bus Right click over the snapshot name and choose Overwrite Snapshot Save the file Make sure that the filters Pan Volume and Solo are now enabled Play the song Click on Full Mix 1 then select Delay and Reverb You will hear only the desired track selection for Full Mix 1 Del Alt click rf Dat Hew ame ae Save Ctrl click Initial Mix 18 03 2010 Filter Full Mix 1 18 03 2010 Full Mix 2 18 03 2010 Full Track Mix Delay and Reverb 18 03 2010 Current Visibility Custom Pan volume C Mute _ F Chain Solo Sends vis Selection Filter on Recall C Selected Tracks Only Prompt For Name
114. and The Command Parameters Window will be displayed 3 Set the value of Track Height A to 80 and Track Height B to 120 Close the Command Parameters Window 4 Right click over an empty area of the Zoom Edit page of the floating toolbar to open the Customize Menus Toolbars window 5 Add two new text icons to this toolbar one for each of the two commands Xenakios SWS Set Selected Tracks Height to A and Xenakios SWS Set Selected Tracks Height to B Give each of these items suitable text labels 6 Save and close the Customize Menus Toolbars window Select say tracks 2 and 5 in the Track Control Panel Experiment with clicking the various icons Track height A track height B toggle minimize with various combinations of tracks selected to see how flexibly this lets you manage your track display 8 Edit the floating toolbar again to add two more SWS actions to the Navigate Edit bar These are SWS Save Current Arrange View and SWS Restore Arrange View This enables you at any time to Save an arrangement view layout exactly as it is shown on your screen then at any time later recall that same layout 2 5 2 Show Hide Floating Item Track Information Item track info Stay 09 Guitar 1 Anne 001 0g9 Pitch 0 Flayrate 1 Take 1 This one is definitely worth a mention The Xenakios SWS action Show hide floating item track info can be used to toggle on and off display of a floating toolbar see above which displays information abou
115. any time quite easily redefine any of your time selections Save the file It s time for a reminder that as interesting as this tutorial is your focus should not be so much on how you can use SWS actions to set up and use multiple loops as on how you can select and execute those actions which you find most useful 2 5 A First Look at Xenakios Extensions By now you should have noticed the Extensions command that has been added ae B to your main REAPER menu just before the Help command You might be Ttem Take selection wondering why some extensions appear on this menu while many others do not The answer is quite simple The commands on this menu were originally Them Take manipulation developed by Xenakios independently of the SWS extensions When these were ise eae eee later incorporated into the SWS extension set the decision was taken leave the Misc Experimental Original menu displayed If you browse this menu and its various submenus you could easily become overwhelmed at the number of items that are displayed We Command parameters k won t be exploring all of these in this guide but we will show you enough to do Disk space calculator much more than just get started PSUS e E Xenakios extensions should now be more correctly referred to as SWS Xenakios extensions 21 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power o
116. apshot name Full Mix 2 to save the snapshot Also save the file Unsolo the track 13 Now select Full Mix 3 Keep the FX chain for this track displayed The EQ should have reverted to its previous settings and the Exciter should have vanished Let s try something else 14 Remove the ReaComp plug in and replace it with ReaXComp 5T Reaxcomp Cockos Track 2 Yox Anne iS a a SF Reascomp 2 Active TopFreqiHj mj 210010 Threshold dE a w t 35 2 m Ratia 1 eg ces il Auto makeup gain Program dependent release Feedback detector ret _ Attack ms 15 Release ma mw ee 150 AMS size ms B J peee EF Log scale automated frequencies Add band Delete band Reset to defaults Solo current band Tabs arid 1 3 15 Make sure that Auto Makeup Gain is deselected on all four bands 16 Adjust the band 3 threshold so that this band is just engaged try about 26 dB Set band 4 parameters as shown above and raise the overall gain to somewhere between 1 dB and 1 5 dB You should now definitely hear a more wispy female vocal now Try it with the track soloed if you like 110 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 17 18 19 20 8 SWS Snapshots It is possible that the overall vocal mix level may now be too loud If so lower the volume of the Vocal
117. as previous track This action is used to add one or two more tracks to a folder immediately above it them Xenakios SWS Dismantle selected folder Select any folder parent track and run this action to restore the status of that track and all its child tracks to normal SWS Indent selected tracks s Makes the selected tracks child tracks with the track immediately above the selection as the parent folder track SWS Outdent selected track s Removes selected track s from a previously created folder 32 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot 2 7 6 Track Management Installing the SWS extensions automatically causes the command Extensions Track Mixer Envelopes to be added to the track control panel context menu These commands are also available by choosing Extensions from REAPER s main menu Save selected tracks as track template Remove selected tracks Duplicate selected tracks Copy selected tracks to clipboard Cut selected tracks to clipboard Render selected tracks to stem tracks and mute originals Render selected tracks to mono stem tracks tand mute originals Enable Free item positioning for selected tracks Show MIDI track control For selected tracks Set all tracks bo automatic record arm when track selected Show selected tracks in tra
118. aster control over the navigation and playback of your project files The examples used in the tutorials are only that examples They have been selected to help you learn Beyond that it s then up to you to apply what you have learnt to suit your own specific priorities In this section you will be introduced to some of the simpler SWS extensions In doing so you will learn how to vy Open and use the Actions List Editor vy Assign an action to a keyboard shortcut v Display actions on the Actions menu vy Assign an action to a custom toolbar As an existing REAPER user you re probably aware of a number of keyboard shortcuts that can assist you when you are navigating and viewing your projects These include using the key to toggle between normal track view and minimized track view and the key to toggle between normal track view and maximizing the height of the currently selected tracks In this tutorial you will discover and use some of the other options that are provided by the SWS extensions Preparation 1 Open the sample project file StayWithMe 2 Immediately save it as StayWithMe23 This name will enable you to associate the file with this section 2 3 should you wish to examine it again at some future date Tutorial 1 Choose the Actions Show Actions List command from REAPER s main menu This opens the Actions Editor window 2 This list contains over 1 000 items Notice that there is a Filter box near the top of this
119. ave different needs The examples shown here aren t necessarily intended to serve as models some people may find these examples useful others will not Their main purpose is to help to get you thinking about how you could string together into custom actions macros those sequences of commands that would be useful to you Region Creating Macro If you re likely to be making good use of regions in your projects then a custom macro like this might help Time selection copy loop points to time selection Markers Insert region from time selection SWS Renumber region IDs Markers Edit region near cursor Loop points Remove loop point selection Time selection Remove time selection After assigning this macro to a keyboard shortcut toolbar or menu you can then simply double click between the two markers then run the macro to create the region Regions will if necessary be automatically renumbered from left to right You will be prompted for a region name after which the time selection and loop points will be removed Copy Paste Marker Set Macro If you are going to working with project file lists especially those which contain multiple different versions of the same project then some macro such as this modified to suit your own needs if necessary could be useful SWS Copy marker set to clipboard Next project tab SWS Paste marker set from clipboard SWS Save marker set File gt Save project This macro will copy and paste the curren
120. bad boad bai Loc Hamoice a D000 008 SIO p Se 1 130B ce 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 enter 5W5 Marker List p00 ong a j 0d center 42 30 12 1 40 154 Region 1 Harmonica 356 896 Marker 2 H End Time Type ID Description 1 40 184 Marker 1 H Stark Save this marker set as Harmonica You can now use the Marker List menu to load either marker set switching between them as you wish Of course you can have in any one project file as many such marker sets as you wish For the sake of this example we only need the two Save the file With the Harmonica marker set selected add another marker at approximately 2 min 11 sec Call this Break end Use the Reorder Marker IDs command to renumber these markers sequentially Right click and choose Save Marker Set from the menu Select Harmonica from the available drop down list and click OK If the Save Marker Set box remains open click on Cancel Delete the Harmonica region but not the markers Resave the marker set Harmonica This will now be saved without the region Save the project file Do not yet close this file Let s now suppose that we want a further marker set one for more general use with this file There s a number of ways that you could do this One way is to take an existing set modify it and save it as a new set Load the Vocals marker list Right click over the marker list window and choose D
121. below EEEE Custom colors Se 2222S H 21 Red 106 UE ed Sat 30 Green 53 efine Custom Colors gt gt Colors olid Lum 5 Blue 83 6 Click on OK to close the Color window then on Save Color Set to File 71 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 7 Navigate to your REAPER Color Themes directory then type a name for example Rainbow Colors then click on Save 8 Close the SWS Color Management window and display the SWS Track Color menu You will see that your color set has now been used to fill the 16 color options 9 Access the SWS Color Management window again and again choose Set Custom Colors For the sake of this example define a set of 16 colors all of which fall within the green to blue area of the color palette 10 When finished close the Windows Color window and save this color set to a file Call it something like Green Blue Close the SWS Color Management window 11 Display the SWS Track Color menu Your Green Blue color definitions are now being used to fill the 16 color options 12 At any time you can revisit the SWS Color Management window and use Load Color Set from File to retrieve and restore your earlier color set the one named Rainbow Colors 6 6 SWS Color Commands It is difficult to see how the SWS color commands listed in Sectio
122. bout this later Beate Wat eE Delete all markers Show SWS Markerlist Ctrl Shirk M heiii E Marker Locking 7 ao H Lock markers Create region From selection Shift R Unlock markers k i Insert time signature marker ShiFt 2 56 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 5 SWS Marker Management 5 3 SWS Marker Command Summary In a moment we ll work thru a tutorial which will help you to understand how powerful and useful the SWS Marker List module is and how you can yourself put it to good use First and for reference purposes here is a summary of the main commands that you will find on the SWS Marker Utilities menu Most of these commands can also be found on the SWS Marker List window right click context menu Load Marker Set This command appears in this form only on the SWS Marker Utilities menu It displays the Load Marker Set prompt for you to select any previously saved marker set to be loaded This command only has any meaning if at least one marker set has previously been created with the current project file Where this is the case the option to load each named marker set will also appear on the SWS Marker List window right click context menu Save Marker Set Saves all current markers into a new set Prompts you for a name before doing so By using marker sets you are able to switch between different sets
123. bypass on tracks 6 8 and 11 fvox Set FX to bypass disable for all tracks whose names begin with vox fvox Enable FX for all tracks whose names begin vox f Toggle FX bypass on all tracks except the master F3 6 Enable FX on tracks 3 thru 6 only Fdrum Enable FX only on those tracks whose names begin with drum Fvox harm Enable FX only on those tracks whose names begin with vox or harm This command replaces the old name with the new name n6 Guitar Mix Renames track 6 as Guitar Mix nVocals Vox Renames track currently called Vocals as Vox This command inserts a text string at the beginning of the existing track name Example bguit Acoustic This command inserts the word Acoustic at the beginning of all tracks whose name currently begins with guit The search thing is not case sensitive but the append string is For example Guitar 1 Mat will become Acoustic Guitar 1 Mat This command inserts a text string at the end of the existing track name Example zvox T3 This commands inserts the text T3 the microphone used at the end of the track name of every track whose name begins with vox For example Vox Anne will become Vox Anne T3 This command sets the color of the selected or specified track s to a color either from the custom color set or as specified by name Examples cvox 12 Changes the color of all tracks whose names begin with vox to custom color 12 See Chapter 6 for more information about custom
124. ca tracks SWS Snapshots xy Del Alt click Save Crl click Mame Date Time Mer Delay and Reverb 16 03 2010 3 19 PM Filter Full Mix 1 1903 2010 11 08 AM Full Mix 2 enjo3iz010 9 05 AM Full Track Mix eS gt rrent visibility Full Mix 3 ae ena Initial Project ls sey casa stom Master 1 F ename Sends 1 Sends 2 4 Right click on the snapshot name Full Mix 3 and choose Delete Selected Track s from Snapshot see right At first glance this doesn t seem to have 4 2 3 S 1 5 6 F Show snapshot details Select tracks in snapshot done anything Add selected track s to snapshot 5 Now select Full Mix 1 The satexs trackis Fram snapshot snapshot settings are a a ane ter on Recall loaded including those for sich i pas lected Tracks Orl the three selected tracks 6 Now click on Full Mix 2 again The snapshot setting for that mix are loaded but notice that for the Others folder and its two child Harmonica tracks nothing changes These remain exactly the same as they were after Full Mix 1 was loaded 7 Now click on Initial Project These settings will be loaded with the second Harmonica track muted 8 Click again on Full Mix 3 Again this snapshot will be loaded but the settings for the three tracks in question will not change By now you should see what s happening 9 Click again on Full Mix 2 then on Full Mix 3 This has the effect of importing into your current mix the settings for th
125. cecseceeeeceececeeanseecneneonsnenenecnearsnseecnsassneansessssueatsueenseeates 148 Bee Adon O ee LEE 10 E 149 LEI vi PIECE Mia S RIG cisacitacccsataceiestisiverdvsiasisdsiadelsdsd on emo 150 a Ele A AE E raves tis vtexn suits 00151 A A E A N EE E T E eee 150 12 19 SWS 20M FACHaIN and CUS ROUNO Pee er ee seen oe eee ee oe ener mre Sarr oredr ene 151 BRS a E cee es masse E E ee ee 153 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions 12 18 SWS Tracklist Track Hide Track SHOW cccccecsccsecsceeceavacavavaueususueueeseeeeuuvaneeeaesnranearanearanears 153 12 19 Finoery ioc ee Rem ods g me ee ee ee ee ee ene ere ere er errr 154 12 20 Xenakios SWS File Management and Manipulation cccccsccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeas 154 12 21 Xenakios SWS Template MalnaQeeiinccecerisssivendearsraewiriiveniiverisdenacisesanasevneonsnveervonenteasansacie 154 12 22 Xenakios SWS Track Folder and Master Track ManaGeMen cccccceceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 155 12 23 Xenakios SWS Media Item MANAGING xcvesicansccsssacacsscenaneerenvaeaiaicsnsacensunsnssenntmanaunneeencecwesianei 156 12 24 Xenakios SWS Takes WT ccs ptcecesetentnsoususnesarsesesnenvnvonoemmenepas ioasaneneatrianeessnreen vacances 158 12 25 Xenakios SWS Navigation and Cursor MOVEMENL cccecccceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaesaeeesaeseeeseeeeees 159 12 26 Xenakios SWS Tools and MiSCellANCOUS ccccccececucucucuavaccecueueueueueuuavavavavavavaeuuuuueunuauaneaneaneass
126. ck list Show selected tracks in mixer Filter visibility by track name Set track color ko custom color Reset volume and pan of selected track s Set volume of selected track s to 0 006 Pan selected track s symmetrically left beiright Pan selected track s symmetrically right to left Pan selected track s randomly Pan selected track s bo center Pan selected tracks to left Pan selected tracks to right Toggle selected track s visible in mixer Set selected track s record armed Set selected track s record unarmed Select next track s Select previous track s set track color to random colors Select next track s keeping current selection set track color to one random color Select previous track s keeping current selection Set track color to default Bypass FX of selected track s SWS track color Un bypass F of selected track s Set track icon Set selected track s heights to 4 Set selected track s height s to B Store selected track s heights Set timebase for selected tracks Set automation mode For selected tracks Recall selected track s heights Select tracks with no items Select tracks with BUSS in name Unselect tracks with BUSS in name Select last track of Folder Set automation mode For all tracks Track performance options Track grouping parameters Shift 6 Track grouping enabled Dismantle selected Folder Show master in track view Ctrl alk M Set selected track s as Folder SWS
127. ck s mutes receives children Restore selected track s selected item s slot 1 thru 5 Restore selected track s selected items states Restore time selection next slot Restore time selection slot 1 thru 5 Save active takes on selected track s Save loop selection slot 1 thru 5 Save selected item s Save selected track s items states Save selected track s mutes receives children Save selected track s selected item s slot 1 thru 5 Save selected track s selected items states Save time selection slot 1 thru 5 Select item s with saved state on selected track s 12 7 SWS Folder Manipulation Actions SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS Indent selected track s Make folder from selected tracks Mute children of selected folder s Set selected folder s collapsed Set selected folder s small Set selected folder s uncollapsed Set selected track s to same folder as previous track Toggle mute of children of selected folder s Unindent selected track s Unmute children of selected folder s 146 SWS_RESTACTTAKES SWS_RESTLASTSEL SWS_RESTLOOPNEXT SWS_RESTLOOP1 SWS_RESTLOOP5 SWS_RESTALLSELITEMS1 SWS_RESTORETRACK SWS_RESTRMUTES SWS_RESTSELITEMS1 SWS_RESTSELONTRACK SWS_RESTTIMENEXT SWS_RESTTIME1 SWS_RESTTIMES SWS_SAVEACTTAKES SWS_SAVELOOP1 SWS_SAVELOOP5 SWS_SAVEALLSELITEMS1 SWS_SAVETRACK SWS_SAVEMUTES SWS_SAVESELITEMS SWS_SAVESELITEMS5 SWS_SAVE
128. color Set selected track s to one random custom color Set selected track s to ordered custom colors Set selected track s to previous track s color Set selected track s to random custom color s Set selected track s item s to custom color Set selected track s item s to one random color Set selected tracks to color gradient Toggle ruler red while recording 12 2 SWS ReaConsole Actions SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS Edit console custom commands restart needed after save Open console Open console and copy keystroke Open console with to add action marker Open console with a to arm track s Open console with b to prefix track s Open console with c to color track s Open console with f to toggle FX enable Open console with h to flip phase on track s Open console with i to set track s input Open console with l to set track s channels Open console with m to mute track s Open console with n to name track s Open console with o to solo track s Open console with P to set track s pan Open console with p to trim pan on track s Open console with S to select track s Open console with V to set track s volume Open console with v to trim volume on track s Open console with z to suffix track s 144 SWS_ITEMRANDCOL SWS_ITEMORDCOL SWS_ITEMORDCOLTRACK SWS_ITEMRANDCOLS SWS_ITEMTRKCOL SWS_COLC
129. colors c7 10 green Changes color of tracks 7 thru 10 to green COxc00cc Set selected tracks to specified hex color in this example purple 140172 Inserts at the current play cursor position a marker with the instruction to go back to the previous marker See Chapter 6 section 2 6 for more information about action markers also known as smart markers ReaConsole s Custom Commands feature see Advanced ReaConsole Features can be used with commands to enable you to assign and use keystrokes to create action markers whenever you wish 135 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 10 3 Known Issues and Limitations When working with ReaConsole you should be aware of the following vy For solo commands solo in place is always assumed even if you have this turned off in your REAPER preferences Track names are always matched case insensitive Track names with strictly numerical names or which contain special characters such as the asterisk Slash comma or semi colon cannot be reliably referenced by name vy ReaConsole s command shortcuts above are not configurable other than by assigning actions as listed at the end of this chapter Tutorial In this tutorial you ll be shown how to dig deeper into using ReaConsole s capabilities 1 Z ef TS eS 11 12 1
130. com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 6 10 The EvilDragon Color Toolbar Finally for this chapter here s a pleasant surprise for you EvilDragon of the REAPER forum in collaboration with fellow forumite carbon has created a clever and useful Colors Toolbar which can be easily used to apply custom colors to tracks items and selections to get one click access to the SWS Color Management window and much more art al Trk all You can download the various components that make up this toolbar and obtain full instructions regarding its installation and use from one of these URLs The text may be case sensitive so be careful if typing If you find that you have a problem with either one then try the other http www cockos com wiki index php EvilDragon s_Color_Toolbar_v2 1a http tinyurl com yk98zoz If neither of these links is successful you should check the REAPER forum A good place to start looking would be in EvilDragon s signature Tip Don t forget that after downloading and installing the EvilDragon Color Toolbar you can add additional items to it such as any of the macros suggested in Section 6 8 or any custom actions and macros of your own 80 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 7 SWS Tracklist and Track Management 7 SWS Tracklist and Track Management REAPER s native
131. cted track s up Pan selected track s randomly Pan selected track s symmetrically left to right Pan selected track s symmetrically right to left Pan selected track s to center Pan selected track s to left Pan selected track s to right Recall selected track s heights Render receives of selected track as stems Rename selected track s Reset volume and pan of selected track s Scroll track view down page Scroll track view to end Scroll track view to home Scroll track view up page Select first of selected track s Select last of selected track s Select last track of folder Select next track s Select next track s keeping current selection Select previous track s Select previous track s keeping current selection Select tracks with BUSS in name Select tracks with no items Set all master track sends muted Set all master track sends unmuted Set master track send 1 thru 5 muted 155 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SW
132. ctions SWS Copy items tracks env obeying time sel and SWS Cut items tracks env obeying time sel If you assign these to Ctrl C and Ctri X respectively then these standard copy cut shortcut keys can be used to copy or cut only the time selection of currently selected items If no time selection is current then the shortcut keys will behave as normal Of course if you prefer you can leave Ctrl C and Ctri X at their default settings and assign different keys to these two SWS actions 36 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot 2 8 About SWS Extensions About SWS Extension An action that appears as the last item on the main Extensions menu and which can also be found in the Actions list is About SWS Extensions It causes the dialog box shown here to be displayed SW5 Extension a REAPER plugin Merged with senakios Command Extensions October 7009 Version 1 7 1 Build 4 built on Apr 32010 Copyright 7 2010 Tim Payne of Standing Water Studios This is useful for a number of reasons but in particular y Checking that you have the latest version of the SWS Extensions Copyright 0 2010 JF B dague 58M actions Copyright 7 2010 P Bourdon Padre actions Copyright 7 2009 enakios License Documentation is available at the SWS website AEE Ww skandingwaterstudios com
133. d You can save and retrieve different keyboard assignments different menu maps and different toolbars and easily record them at will Of course you wouldn t want to be doing this every five minutes but if you plan carefully this solution is workable Identify which actions you are likely to need for example only when you are building your project which you are likely to need when editing which are most useful to you when you are mixing and which you need all the time These can then be saved into different groups to be imported and used as required This enables you for Tere example to assign the same keystrokes to several Export al hs different commands or actions Which one you use at any ie i Export selected items time will depend on which stage of your project you ve 7 reached Restore all shortcut bindings to Factory defaults You ll find more information about exporting and importing these settings in the REAPER User Guide but here is an overview Se Open projects from list REAPER Key Maps can be exported saved to PAd soiste deco nutes file and imported retrieved using the l Import Export button in the bottom left corner of the Actions window a pork all menusftoolbars to ReaperkenuSet File The process is quite simple and 20 P q P e AE Export current menuftoolbar to ReaperMenu File straightforward Sj a 3 5 ci F x S Y a x g x S Y X REAPER custom menus
134. d time reverses the sort order To delete a file from a group In the Files pane click on the File name and press Delete This only removes the file from the group not from your hard disk Note that you cannot delete a file directly from the Project group in the Media Pool To do this you must delete the file from the Arrangement View of the project itself 127 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 To audition any file in the Select the file in the file list and click on the Play button media pool To create an action for any To create an action for any media pool item simply enable the Action file in the media pool option for that item by clicking on its dot in the Action column Shown below is our Percussion group listed alphabetically by file name with actions assigned to seven of the items SWS Media Pool Groups Group Global Path Filename Action Project D Samples HT waw 18 Percussion D Samples HandClap way 5 Guitars D Samples HandClape waw 0 Samples Hat wary D Samples HighTom waw D Samples kicki way 0 Samples Kick way D Samples LO way 0 Samples LowTom waw CD Samples MA wav D Samples ME wav D Samples MidTom waw D Samples OHIHat waw D Samples QHiHat_ 2 wav D Samples Ride wary D Samples RimShot waw D 5amples RimShot_2
135. d updated in real time beneath the edit box see above 131 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 10 11 12 13 14 10 2 Let s see how this sounds without the vocal delay added Type m 3 4 and notice the message that is displayed see example above Press Ctrl Enter These tracks are muted Check the track numbers for your two reverb tracks Assuming these are 15 and 16 type m 15 16 and press Ctri Enter The Reverb tracks will also now be muted Now type m 3 4 15 16 and press Ctri Enter All four tracks are unmuted SWS ReaConsole To now select the Reverb tracks type s15 16 Ctrl Enter Ne To increase the volume of both Reverb tracks by 2 La ee ee eee decibels type v2 Ctri Enter in this example it is important that you use the lower case letter v To close ReaConsole press Esc Now switch to the SWS Snapshots window and make sure Full Track Mix is selected Click on New to create a new snapshot Call it Fill Mix 2 Extra Reverb Save the file ReaConsole Command Summary The table below summarizes the available ReaConsole commands together with examples of how they might be used Notice that some ReaConsole command letters for example p and v have different meanings depending on whether they are typed in lower case or upper case Some other factors to keep in
136. dd selected track s to current snapshot 4dd selected track s to all snapshots he Delete selected track s From current snapshot Delete selected track s From all snapshots Default menu Track control panel context Select current snapshot s track s New snapshot fall tracks New snapshot selected track s Save over current snapshot Recall current snapshot Copy current snapshot Copy new snapshot selected trackis Copy new snapshot fall trackisy Paste snapshot Many of the SWS Snapshot commands and actions are by default added to the TCP Context menu This can be displayed by right clicking over any track name or number in the TCP or MCP Of course you can also use the menu customizer to add any of the other available actions to this menu In addition to those commands that are also available from the SWS Snapshots Window you will find the following Add Selected Tracks to All Adds the track settings of all currently selected tracks applying Snapshots whatever filter settings are currently specified to all snapshots in the current project file Delete Selected Tracks from Deletes the track settings of all currently selected tracks applying All Snapshots whatever filter settings are currently specified from all snapshots in the current project file Copy new snapshot selected Copies a snapshot of the selected tracks to the clipboard using current tracks s filter settings without adding a snapshot to the current proj
137. dge section loop start later 12 26 Xenakios SWS Tools and Miscellaneous Xenakios SWS Disk space calculator Xenakios SWS Item property interpolator Xenakios SWS Jump edit cursor by random amount exp distribution 159 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Launch external tool 1 Launch external tool 2 Open REAPER project in item BWAV info autosearch for RPP if necessary Project media Recall edit cursor position Recall render speed Repeat paste Save current contents of actions list to file Save project markers as text Set render speed to not limited Set render speed to realtime Shift current envelope to left Shift current envelope to right Show hide floating item track info Store edit cursor position Store render speed Time selection adaptive delete 160 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions 161 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide
138. e working with a project file open that has more than five related projects then the necessary number of extra actions are automatically made available For example if a project with six related projects has focus then the action SWS Open project 6 will also be available Unfortunately at the time of writing it is not yet possible to customize the Project Tab context menu However the tutorials that follow will show you how both sets of commands together with their associated assignable actions can be used to assist with your project management 49 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 4 3 Project List Management The techniques and procedures for working with and managing project lists are as follows Activity Method Create a project list containing a group of Open each project file required individually in its own project projects tab then use the File SWS Project Management Save List of All Open Projects command Open all files in a project list Use the File SWS Project Management Open Projects from List command Add a project to an existing project list Open the project list then open each of the files you wish to add to the project list each in its own project tab Then use the File SWS Project Management Save List of All Open Projects command to resave the
139. e Customize Menus Toolbars window select the required item in this case Media Item Context then drag and drop SWS Item Color gt up the list S5 item color SWS Sek selected itemis to calor white Item settings SWS Set selected items to colatiblack Item properties Fz Set to one random custom color Source properties Ctrl Fe Set to random custom coloris Set to color gradient per track Group Set to color gradient Take Item processing Set to ordered custom colors per track Set bo ordered custom colors Extensions kem Take selection Set bo track color Extensions Tkem Take manipulation a Set to custom color 1 Open items in editor WY Set to custom color 2 Item notes Set to custom color 3 Apply track FX bo items as new take E Set to custom color 4 4oply track FX bo items as new take mono output WY Set to custom color 5 Apply track Fe bo items as new bake MIDI output I Set to custom color 6 WW Set to custom color 7 Set to custom color 6 B Set to custom color 9 E Set to custom color 10 Copy selected items Chri Set to custom color 11 WH Set to custom color 12 WH Set to custom color 13 Cut selected items Etrit E Set to custom color 14 Cut selected area of selected items Ctrlt Delete WH set to custom color 15 J Set to custom color 16 Remove selected items Color management Render items as new bake Reverse items as new bake Glue selected items Trim items to selected area Notice that in the
140. e Others folder and the Harmonica tracks from Full Mix 2 10 We can now make some change to these Add an instance of ReaEQ to the Others folder before the compressor Add a little gain no more than 3 dB around 200 Hz and lower the gain control around 3 500 Hz by about 3 dB In both cases use a bandwidth of about 1 3 octaves 11 Right click over the Full Mix 2 snapshot name and choose Overwrite Snapshots Save the file 108 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 8 4 7 Tutorial 7 FX Chains and Snapshots Some of the earlier examples that you have worked thru have included exercises which involve attaching FX plug ins to snapshots and saving these into the snapshot along with their various parameters This section explores some of the possibilities that mixing snapshots give you for FX management in more depth The possibilities here are almost boundless In this section you will be shown some examples of how you can use SWS Snapshots for the management of FX within REAPER After that it s up to you to let your own imagination and creativity take over The examples that you will be shown include how to Store different FX parameter values in different snapshots S Store different FX chains in different snapshots v Use different track parameter controls with different snapshots vy Use different automation curves envelop
141. e for each number in the range starting with SWS Set selected track s to custom color 1 and ending with SWS Set selected track s to custom color 16 This convention is used throughout this chapter SWS Open color management window SWSCOLORWND SWS Set selected item s to color black SWS_BLACKITEM SWS Set selected item s to color gradient SWS_ITEMGRAD SWS Set selected item s to color gradient per track SWS_ITEMTRACKGRAD SWS Set selected item s to color white SWS_WHITEITEM SWS_ITEMCUSTCOL1 SWS_ITEMCUSTCOL16 SWS Set selected item s to next custom color SWS_COLITEMNEXTCUST SWS Set selected item s to custom color 1 thru 16 143 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS Set selected item s to one random custom color Set selected item s to ordered custom colors Set selected item s to ordered custom colors per track Set selected item s to random custom color s Set selected item s to respective track color Set selected track s children to same color Set selected track s to color black Set selected track s to color white Set selected track s to custom color 1 thru 16 Set selected track s to next custom color Set selected track s to next track s
142. e required position on the vertical bar to the right see position of mouse pointer then on OK 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the second of the two colors shown to select the gradient stop color 5 Close the SWS Color a Tp reee AAT Management window ed Baw Lee 6 With the TCP or MCP selected ne O press Ctri A to select all tracks 7 Right click over any track number and choose SWS Track Color then Set to Color Gradient 8 Each track will now be individually colored as shown on the right The changes in color from track to track together make up a transition from your gradient start color to your gradient stop color Shown below is an example of how this effect could be applied to a series of media items Note If your screen display does not show color tinting on the track control panel and or media items similar to that shown above this might be because of your REAPER Preferences Settings see Section 6 7 70 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 6 5 6 SWS Color Management SWS Color Sets The screen shot at the very beginning of this chapter includes a menu which displays a selection of 16 custom colors In this section you will learn how to create and use your own color sets An SWS color set is created using the normal Windows Colors window that you used in the previous tutorial Once
143. e the file 5 Now in the Snapshots window select the Snapshot Vocals Only Both of the new tracks are shown together with those that you saved into this snapshot earlier 6 We want to add the new vocal track to this snapshot Select the new vocal track and only this track in the TCP or MCP 7 Right click over Vocals Only and choose Add Selected Track s to Snapshot 8 Now select the Snapshot All Tracks We want to add both our new tracks to this snapshot 9 Inthe TCP or MCP select both the Vox Extra track and the Fiddle track Right click over All Tracks in the Snapshots window and choose Add Selected Track s to Snapshot 10 Now you can enable the option Hide New Tracks on Vis Recall Save the file 11 Select your Vocals Only snapshot All vocal tracks are shown including the new one but no other tracks are shown 12 Select All Tracks All tracks are shown 13 Select Guitars Only Only the guitar tracks are shown 14 Save the file 114 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 8 4 9 Tutorial 9 Import Export Copy Paste Snapshots Basics This next topic is quite a complex one As before it will make more sense after you have worked thru a tutorial In overview however there are a number of commands that you can use to copy snapshot settings from one project into another You have available two very similar opt
144. earn vy How to create and name snapshots v How to recall snapshots vy How to switch between snapshots Vv How to modify and save changes to a snapshot Tutorial 1 Open the file StayWithMe66 RPP and save it as StayWithMe841 RPP 2 For the sake of this exercise delete the two sends to the VoxVerb track one each a 3 Xi from Vox Anne and Vox Name Date Time phlei oocyte Mat Replace these with a 1 Initial Mix 16 03 2010 12 34 PM Sib 7 single send post fader post be Full Track Mix pan from the Vocals folder Current Visibility 3 View the SWS Snapshots oem window 4 Make sure the option Prompt for Name is enabled Filter on Recall Selected Tracks Only Prompt For Name 5 Select the filter option Full Track Mix then click on New When prompted fora Tiere ee name type Initial Mix and on Vis Recall press Enter You now have a snapshot of this project that you can return to at any time see right 99 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 10 11 I2 13 14 I5 16 Ly 18 Save the project file Now try this quick experiment Try making adjustments to the volume and or pan settings of any of the tracks and folders Delete some of the FX for example from the guitar tracks Mute the harmonica Make as much of a mess of this mi
145. ect Copy new snapshot all Copies a snapshot of the all tracks to the clipboard using current filter tracks s settings without adding a snapshot to the current project This additional copy paste functionality is especially useful if you have a group of track settings that you want to copy and paste into other existing projects For example suppose that you have recorded a number of projects with drum tracks or a similar vocal arrangement You get your folder arrangements panning relative volume levels FX and so on just right on one track Using Copy new snapshot selected tracks s and Paste Snapshot you are able to reproduce those settings easily and quickly on those same tracks in your other projects overwriting existing settings You can also do the same to set these tracks up on new projects Let s look at one possible example of this 119 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 8 5 1 In this example we ll say that we re happy with our FX Pan and Sends settings in the project file StayWithMe8491 and that we wish to use them as the basis of a new song that we are going to record with the same group The new song however will not require a harmonica Tutorial 10 More Copy Paste Snapshot Functions Tutorial 1 Open the file StayWithMe8491 2 In anew project tab create a new p
146. ected track s height s to B Restore saved arrange view SWS Restore arrange view Show all tracks SWS Show all tracks 41 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 3 2 Simple Media Item Edit Macros Everyone s editing needs will be different Some people will need to frequently perform a task which may be almost never needed by other people and vice versa For this reason it would be very difficult to give you a series of item editing macros that would be useful for everybody As in previous sections take a look at the examples that are included here and see what you can learn from them Hopefully you will find them useful but even if you do not come to implement these particular examples they should at the very least help you to identify other areas where item editing macros might be useful In this section it is again assumed that you have the option under Editing Behavior Mouse Select both time and items when using right click marquee enabled Delete and Restore Part of an Item You probably already have developed your own preferred method for deleting sections of an item One way is to do the following vy Right click and drag over the media item to select the required area vy Press Ctri Delete This has already been in the items shown below Originally one item three sections ha
147. eeri aaa aaa aai da 94 Snapshot MCI naaran e N a 119 Snapshot Paste WindOW c cccsssssssssesssssseesceeeaeeeeeeeas 115 Snapshot Paste ules x i22255552420 1455 60 424sastsacassemencntaviaaeees 121 Snapshot Add Selected TrackS ccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 SMAPSHOE COPY daa e aaaea 95 115 Snapshot copy MEW neee eee 119 Snapshot Delete noaea N aa 94 Snapshot Delete Selected Tracks c cc cccccceeeeee eens 94 Snapshot Edit NaMe inc ici tot acct aa aa 94 Snapshot EXPO eroras enews 95 115 Snapshot PuUterS oaoiiaaiiiai aioe 96 Snapshot LMP OR sacscsessieieisevaseoda snes teeteecs Gest 95 115 Snapshot Overwrite keca ese ae era 94 SMAPS HOt PASE enun a EE 95 115 Snapshot Recalls rare estet teeta auneamee ee 95 SNApSHOU SIVE ekoe ae a ae ce eee 94 Snapshot Select and Recall cc cccccccceeeeeeseseeeeeeeeees 94 Soaps hol g scence eae chee eee eee 93 Snapshots Wind Wecare o 93 Snapshots Add All Tracks to cccceeceeseeseeeseeeeceeeeees 119 Snapshots Add Selected Tracks to eeeeeeeeee 119 Snapshots Delete Selected Tracks from 000068 119 Sila NS HOTS expor i asns nnna ics aces acer seas ee 122 snapshots iMporting sssssssssssessseeeeseseeeseeeeesessrrressseee 122 Snaps hols SOLE DAU setae ccleaner tata ees 94 SOUS TOS a Sat aaa Nae erie 133 Standing Water Studi0S cicccsssssscseeeseeseeesesesceccaseeeeees 12 SWS Color Management assisti ataa aeia 67 SWS C
148. efined as Global then all of the media files contained in that group are automatically listed and made available to every REAPER project Global group information such as group name and a list of the files it contains are stored in a file Ssws_mediapool txt which can be found in the same directory as your reaper ini file When a user created group is defined as Local then the group itself and all of the media files that it contains are only displayed and only available when the individual REAPER project for which the group was created has focus Information about local groups such as group names and the list of files it contains are stored with the project in its RPP file The SWS Media Pool window consists of two panes a Groups pane and a Files pane The Groups pane lists all global groups together with any local groups that belong to the current project These will include the Project group that is automatically created for you and any groups that you have created yourself As with other SWS windows you can click on any column header to sort the list of groups If you are creating a new project file then the Project group will be initially empty The Files pane displays a list of all files contained in the currently selected group Path and file name information is displayed together with a column called Action We ll get to what that does shortly but in brief it is a quick method of adding to the Action List an action for adding pa
149. eft of selected item s to selection Adds the first item to the left of each item in the current item selection to that selection May be used with multiple tracks Add item s to right of selected item s to selection Adds the first item to the right of each item in the current item selection to that selection May be used with multiple tracks Horizontal zoom to selected item s Zoom horizontally to the current item selection Restore saved selected item s Restores previously saved item selection Save selected item s Saves current item selection Vertical zoom to selected item s Zooms vertically to the current item selection Nudge item positions left or right beat based or time based A set of four actions any of which can be used to nudge all items in the current item selection as required Select items to end of track Selects all items to the right of and including the currently selected item in the current track Select items to start of track Selects all items to the left of and including the currently selected item in the current track Split items at transients Identifies each transient and splits the selected waveform into its individual elements Illustrated below is an example of this before and after 43 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784
150. elected track s Toggle mute on receives for selected track s Unbypass FX on selected track s 148 SWS_HIDEDOCK SWS_HIDEMASTER SWS_METROOFF SWS_METROON SWS_RESTOREXFD SWS_RESTREPEAT SWS_SAVEXFD SWS_SAVEREPEAT SWS_XFDOFF SWS_XFDON SWS_MVPWIDOFF SWS_MVPWIDON SWS_SETREPEAT SWS_SHOWDOCK SWS_SHOWMASTER SWS_GRIDSPACING SWS_TOGDEFFADEZERO SWS_TOGRECMOVECUR SWS_RECTOGGLE SWS_UNSETREPEAT SWS_BYPASSFX SWS_CREATETRK1 SWS_DELTRACKCHLD SWS_DISMASTERFX SWS_DISMPSEND SWS_ENMASTERFX SWS_ENMPSEND SWS_INSRTTRKABOVE SWS_MINTRACKS SWS_MUTERECVS SWS_MUTESENDS SWS_NAMETKLIKEITEM SWS_RESTMSTFXEN SWS_SAVEMSTFXEN SWS_SETMONMEDIA SWS_SETRECSRCOUT SWS_TOGMPSEND SWS_TOGMUTERECVS SWS_UNBYPASSFX For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions Unmute all receives for selected track s Unmute all sends from selected track s Unset selected track s monitor track media while recording Set selected track s pan law to 2 5db Set selected track s pan law to 3 0db Set selected track s pan law to 4 5db Set selected track s pan law to 6 0db Set selected track s pan law to 0 0dB Set selected track s pan law to 2 5db Set selected track s pan law to 3 0db Set selected track s pan law to 4 5db Set selected track s pan
151. elete All Regions Add a marker at the point where the song begins approximately 0 min 4 3 sec and another at the point that you want the fadeout to end approximately 3 min 39 95 sec Renumber the markers right click Reorder Marker IDs Now save these markers as a marker set called General 59 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 26 Now when you switch between marker sets the Harmonica set will include the extra marker that you added but not the region that you deleted You will also have an extra set General with six markers see below DZ fF OOK ESD Stat 261 Start NA End 42 Start Sle lEnd d ibe Let il ir laa E vea OB TE mmo j Ue 1 42 00 ae rr et ee ee ee Type ID Description O 04 299 Marker Start O 29 064 Marker Wi Start 1 42 515 Marker Yi End z2 08 029 Marker We Start 3 35 2686 Marker ve End 359 955 Marker End 27 Save the file 5 5 Docking the SWS Marker List Window The SWS Marker List window can be docked in REAPER s docker in much the same way as can 2 Guitar 2 Mat io fen f2 mgpa most other windows Simply choose the a _L 1 9448 37 L command Dock Marker List in Docker from the context menu This command is a toggle iuitar 1 Anne ABGHovoe choosing the same command again will undock CRAE OTIA ave marker ce
152. em s Select takes in selected item s shuffled random Select takes of selected item s cyclically Set volume and pan of selected takes Store current selected takes Take mixer Toggle selected takes normalized unity gain 12 25 Xenakios SWS Navigation and Cursor Movement Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Move cursor left 10 pixels Move cursor left 10 pixels creating time selection Move cursor left configured pixels Move cursor left configured pixels creating time selection Move cursor left configured seconds Move cursor right 10 pixels Move cursor right 10 pixels creating time selection Move cursor right configured pixels Move cursor right configured pixels creating time selection Move cursor right configured seconds Move cursor to next transient minus default fade time Move cursor to previous transient minus default fade time Move edit cursor 32nd note left Move edit cursor 32nd note right Move edit cursor 64th note left Move edit cursor 64th note right Nudge section loop length longer Nudge section loop length shorter Nudge section loop overlap longer Nudge section loop overlap shorter Nudge section loop start earlier Nu
153. eneuenensaesessseenenses 47 AAEE pae el i ete E AIA E A E E O E N AAAA eaten A E 47 42 SWS Project Management Command Sisirririrsrreneen adain 48 Aa LSE anae aa E 50 4 4 The SWS Project List WindOW s ssssssnsnsnnsnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnrnrnnnnrnrnrnenenennnnnnrnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnrnnennnnne 52 4 5 Related Project Pe sce picasa cece cncinvs ec eaas a anes eaueen ere vevevantee ease etenermcsaeee 53 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions 4 6 Track Management with Related Project cscscsscseonescseececeesrsneceseececsecesescneseneasenseeonensnsaseass 54 5 SWS Marker ManaGeme ntt cccscscsesescnenscnseesesesensnsneseeeeseseuensnseeceeeenenenenenenesseaeas 55 S Ne Ud L oo sestrnisteceecescencecvutc ee bam ca dn abana niev areca eae tke leader ce enen 55 9 2 Available Marker ee ae be ee bates erp irsec capi mb pte ede cedentene deo score einsenwe eemreierenicmenee 56 tr a S aE E 57 Oe A eau and USING Markor Soucis AAAA A AO 58 5 5 Docking the SWS Marker List WiNndOW ssessssssssssnsnnsnsnnnnrnrnrnrnnnennnnrnrnrnrnrnnnrnnnnnnnnrnenenenennnnrnnne 60 5 6 Copying Markers Between Projects sccsssesrssccessesnsuccnssccueescusescnceccuessenssscucessusaveusuecesesensuseenas 61 Od Bpotng Formatted Marker Lists erirriinnena etait 62 5 8 Other SWS Marker List Window FeatureS s snnnsnsnsnsnnsnsnnnnnnnnnnrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrurnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnne 65 5 8 1 Windows Screen Set COmpattibility c ccccsccecsececsrenecec
154. er Archive RPP With the main file open and in focus use the Add Related Project command add the archive file to it as a related project Then create this simple macro Tracks Cut selected tracks SWS Open related project 1 Item Paste items tracks File gt Save project Close current project tab Now at any time you can select any tracks in your main project and run this macro to automatically have them removed from the main project and added instead to the archive project 54 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 5 SWS Marker Management 5 SWS Marker Management 5 1 The SWS Marker List In Chapter 2 of this guide you encountered smart markers also Known as command markers In this section you will be introduced to some more SWS marker and region management capabilities using the Marker List As with so many of the SWS features don t be deceived by the simplicity of its name The SWS Marker List module has a great deal more functionality than simply listing markers Type I Description Marker 1 Region 1 Drums Marker 2 E wox Co Save marker set Region 2 Delete market set Copy marker set to clipboard Paste marker set From clipboard Reorder marker IDs Reorder region IDs K Delete selected marker s Delete all markers Delete all regions ie i rim Ie Export formatted marker lis
155. er your experience of working with REAPER the more you will get out of it This User Guide assumes that you already have a reasonable working knowledge of REAPER and that you are at ease within the REAPER environment You should at the very least be familiar with basic tasks such as v Creating naming and saving project files Creating tracks and recording material Simple editing tasks like deleting and copying media items Simple everyday tasks like starting and stopping playback Navigating thru a project file Creating and deleting markers and regions XY NN NNN Selecting and unselecting items v Adding basic effects such as ReaEQ and ReaComp to tracks To get the best out of this guide you should also have at least a fundamental grasp of a number of less basic tasks including v Creating and using folders vy Creating and using sends and receives between tracks vy Creating and using basic automation envelopes Y Simple grouping functions v Assigning shortcut keys and creating custom actions You ll find some help here with the less basic topics as and when they arise However to understand these features more fully and to get the best out of the SWS Extensions you should consult the REAPER User Guide and or REAPER Power 14 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot 2
156. es for the same parameter within different snapshots Tutorial part 1 This section covers a lot of material For your convenience the tutorial will be split into three parts First let s deal with FX parameters and FX chains 1 If the file StayWithMe846 is not still open open it Save it as StayWithMe847 Open the SWS Snapshots window and make sure Full Track Mix is selected in the Filter column 2 Select Full Mix 2 We are going to experiment YST ReaComp Cockos Track 5 ox Mat with how we handle the 2 4 in 2 out U1 het male vocal track Vox ReaComp Mat m Envelope Output mi _ 3 Open the FX window for Pre comp kai this track and select Attack reba ReaComp Set the Release 209 threshold to about 23 dB ratio to about 10 1 Classic attack v Auto release and the wet output level Rati A 10 1 to about 3 5 dB Lal EE 10 3 Enable the auto release s option see right Detector input Main Input LA Together these settings Bees make for a more evened Lowpass ma 20000 Hz out volume 22 9 gp Highpass Lj Hz Preview filter T Auto make up 3 l AA Limit output 4 Hold Ctrl while you click Threshold AMS size a e aU on the snapshot name Full Mix 2 These changes are now saved into the snapshot Save the file 5 Now select Full Mix 3 Notice that the compressor settings are changed This time let s really go for a full on compressor e
157. ese Edit Custom Action Filter Custom action name _ swe Minimize Empty Tracks Exported marker list format S S Save current track selection Hide all tracks Menakios S4 S Select tracks with no iteme Hide docker S S Minimize selected track s Hide master track in track control panel SW5 Restore saved track selection Hide selected track s Hide selected track s from MCP Hide selected track s from TCF Hide unselected track s Horizontal scroll to put edit cursor at 10 Horizontal scroll to put edit cursor at SOS Horizontal scroll to put play cursor at 502 Horizontal zoom to selected itemele Indent selected track s Insert track above selected tracks Load marker set Consolidate undo points Make folder from selected tracks Minimize selected track s Show in actions menu Move selected temnlsl left edoe to edit cursor You might have noticed when browsing that the track selection actions include several options for hiding and showing tracks in the track control panel and or the mixer control panel We ll come to these in detail in Chapter 7 when we examine the SWS track list and track management module but in the meantime here are a couple of simple but useful examples of how you might wish to apply some of these actions Show and increase height of only the current track selection SWS Save current arrange view SWS Hide unselected tracks SWS Xenakios SWS Set sel
158. example is shown above In this case two projects are already open You can right click over the Project List window and open the entire list from the Project List window The Project List then can make life a lot easier than hopping between tabs when you are SWS Project List Open working with a large number of projects open at the same time If you are working in a situation such as this you should choose Yes when So ace ay ae asked if you wish to Close Active Tabs First Otherwise those files will be opened again so that each will be open twice in two separate project tabs Below is a summary of the SWS Project List window commands Command Explanation Save list of open projects Saves all currently open projects into a project list Open projects from list Opens all projects from a projects list You will be prompted to decide whether you want currently open projects closed first Dock Project List in Docker Toggles the docked status of the SWS Project List Window Close Window Closes the SWS Project List Window Double click on any project name Open select that project 52 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 4 SWS Project Management 4 5 Related Project Management The technique of relating projects is less formal and less rigid than is that of creating lists of grouped projects As you ha
159. eze macro New takes will be rajectA SWS User Guide projects StayWithMe Stay O7 Guitar 1 Matogg rendered see right and the tracks in these folders will be frozen 5 User Guide projects S tay ithh eS tay 0 Guitar 1 Mat render 005 0gg 5 Display the item properties for the male vocal track and disable Play All Takes 6 Play the song again It should sound exactly the same as before Co 7 Now select the same folders again and run the Unfreeze macro Display the item properties for the male vocal and enable the Play All Takes option 8 Save the file Note If you are concerned about having to manually disengage and engage the Play All Takes option you could pursue either of two solutions One would be to include a play all takes toggle action in your macros The other would be to render to new tracks rather than new takes 142 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions In this chapter you will find a summary of the main SWS actions associated with each main extension module as well as those utility actions that are not specifically associated with any particular module For the latest information you should check the SWS web site http www standingwaterstudios com As you browse this list most items will fall into o
160. f related projects Note that it only removes the project file from the group it does not delete the actual RPP file SWS Project List Opens the SWS Project List window this can be used to help manage a project list and its constituent files Related project list Where related projects have been added to the currently open project these will be listed on the SWS Project Management sub menu In the example illustrated above the currently open project has four projects related to it For most intents and purposes these commands can be regarded as falling into two sets The first two commands Save List and Open from List make up one set being commands that manage project list files the remaining commands make up the other being the commands that manage related projects As well as the menu commands listed above there are a number of other SWS actions which can be assigned to keyboard shortcuts toolbar icons REAPER menus and or control surface buttons to assist you with your project management Together these are listed below SWS Save list of open projects SWS Switch to project tab 1 thru 10 SWS Open projects from list SWS Switch to first project tab SWS Add related project SWS Switch to last project tab SWS Delete related project SWS Open Project List SWS Open related project 1 thru 5 The Open related project and Switch to project tab extensions are intelligent for example if you ar
161. f SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 2 5 1 Extension Command Parameters In this section you are going to be introduced to one very important aspect of the Xenakios extensions using command parameters If you browse the Extensions menu and sub menus you will find many commands which include phrases like configured pixels configured seconds track height A and track height B By themselves these expressions make little sense However if you look in the window shown below you will see references for example to pixels seconds track height A track height B and much more besides It s time to take a look at this Extension Command Parameters Window SWS Extention Command Parameters Fades Configuration 4 ltem position nudge seconds Fade In Time 9 007 Fade ut Time 9 007 ltem position nudge beats Fade In Shape Q Fade Out Shape 9 ltem pitch nudge 4 semitones Configuration B Fade In Time 0001 Fade Out Time 0001 ltem pitch nudge E semitones Fade In Shape p Fade Out Shape p tem Take volume nudge 1 dE Track volume nudge 1 dB Randomization Edit cursor random jump mean 1 00 seconds Pixels edit cursor Random ltem Select Probability 50 0 SIEBER Belt cttn Section loop properties seconds Tracks Track height amp 50 Track height E 50 Labels default Audio prefis zuffi External Tool 1 External Editor 3 External Tool 2 External Editor 4 This window is used to store par
162. f all REAPER actions were as simple well known and frequently used as this one there would be no need for this User Guide However actions go a long way beyond executing simple menu tasks like saving and opening files It is true that every one of the commands that you see on your REAPER menus is an action However it s also true that there are literally hundreds of other actions that do not appear on any menus but which can also be used to make your REAPER experience a faster happier and more productive ones These include actions for navigating editing customizing the REAPER environment and ar ee a much much more These actions are initially accessed via the Actions PE E Show Action List command on the REAPER main menu see right i Insert Actions Extensions Help Using the Action List Editor you can chain together whole sequences of these actions to create your own custom macros so that a whole series of half a dozen actions or more can be launched with a single keystroke or click of the mouse That s what you re going to be doing as you progress further into this guide We ll start however with some quite simple examples then build up to more complex and powerful custom macros later Right now what you need to be aware of is that there are six main ways an action can be executed You determine yourself which and how many of these are used for any particular action Keep in mind that these are only examples designed to help
163. fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 The tutorials in this section are designed primarily to show you how the SWS extensions can be used to help you get the very best out of using REAPER s markers Try and keep focussed primarily on the techniques that are being used here rather than being too concerned about the actual examples themselves 5 4 Creating and Using Marker Sets In this section you will learn how to v Create different marker sets for use with different tracks and groups of tracks vy Switch between different marker sets v Maintain marker sets including modifying them and deleting them Tutorial 1 Close any other files that may be open and open the file StayWithMe273 2 Save this file as StayWithMe54 3 For the sake of this exercise delete any markers that you may have previously added to this file 4 We are now going to create some markers and regions specifically to help us when editing and or mixing the vocal tracks Bl I 2 I1 Start eed 32 Start 0000 p00 00g ot O 00db 44 me Do0 miu SWS Marker List J si 000 2o 7 Time Type ID Description e 0 29 064 Marker Wi Start 0 29 064 Region Verse 1 hte edd ds 1 42 818 Marker vi End 208 029 Marker We Stark 208 029 Region Verse Z A000009 B 335256 Marker Y2 End Sean Dui 5 Display the SWS Marker List window Create four markers at the approximate positions shown above The
164. ffect Set pre comp to about 100 ms and engage both classic attack and auto release Set the threshold to about 28 dB ratio round 15 1 knee size about 15 dB and wet output to 5 5 dB 6 Hold Ctrl while clicking on the snapshot name Full Mix 3 to save the snapshot Also save the file 7 As you switch between the three full mix snapshots you will notice a definite difference in the qualities of this vocal If you found one you especially liked you could use the same technique as in Tutorial 6 to bring these settings into one or other of your Full Mix snapshots 109 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 8 Now let s turn our attention to the female vocal track Vox Anne 9 Select this track and display its FX chain Select Full Mix 2 It might help to solo the track while you are working thru the next few steps 10 Select the ReaEQ plug in and select band 3 lower the gain to about 2 5 dB This makes the vocal just a little more wispy 11 At the end of the FX chain add 3S SStillwellexciter Track 2 Yox Anne JS SStillwell exciter a8 exciter treble enhancer maa Use fairly conservative a mi a 106 m settings as shown here an drive 1 a 54 30 right Ay frequency ee a 4500 0 mai 12 Hold Ctrl while clicking 4 on the sn
165. ffects alternately enabling one set whilst bypassing the other Another example when you might wish to use a macro such as this could be to compare two completely different FX chains on the same track or item You would just need to place both sets of effects in the track or item s FX chain first all the effects in the first chain then the second and set all of the effects in one of the chains to bypass This macro would then toggle between alternately enabling one chain while bypassing the other Notice that you do not need to have as many as eight effects in a track or item s FX chain in order to be able to use this macro If you have fewer than eight the surplus commands are just ignored 140 FX Track 6 Acoustic Guitars folder Fs Edit Options O YST ReaEn Cockos WST ReaEQ Cockos O vst ReaDelay Cockos WOT ReaDelay Cockos O sT ReaComp Cockoz W VST om Cockos O 2 0 4 CPU O00 sple Comment Preset fe FReaLlomp Envelope Fre comp Attack Release Ratio Knee size Threshold AMS siz For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 11 More Examples of Custom Actions 11 2 Track Freeze Unfreeze Macros Track freeze macros can be used to apply effects to track s or item s so as to free up computer resources such as CPU Unfreeze macros reverse this process allowing you to make adjustments
166. for selected track s SWS Restore track selection Again you would most likely want to enable the option to Consolidate Undo Points with this macro 139 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 11 1 3 Individual FX Bypass Toggle Getting your FX parameter settings just right can take time the more so if you have a number of effects chained in a track or media item The following macro can make it easier to compare alternate chains with different settings for the same series of FX SWS S amp M Toggle FX1 bypass for selected track s SWS S amp M Toggle FX2 bypass for selected track s SWS S amp M Toggle FX3 bypass for selected track s SWS S amp M Toggle FX4 bypass for selected track s SWS S amp M Toggle FX5 bypass for selected track s SWS S amp M Toggle FX6 bypass for selected track s SWS S amp M Toggle FX7 bypass for selected track s SWS S amp M Toggle FX8 bypass for selected track s Again you would most likely want to enable the option to Consolidate Undo Points with this macro The illustration on the right illustrates one example of how this can be used In this case there are two instances each of ReaEQ ReaDelay and ReaComp The first instance of each of these is currently set to bypass whilst the second is enabled Running this macro would toggle between the two sets of e
167. g Transport record stop Deceptively simple it means that the same key can be used to start and stop recording rather than having to use Ctri R and Stop If using this action assign it the same keystroke in both the Main and Main alt recording sections Set selected track s record armed Set selected track s record unarmed These two commands are especially useful if you need to arm unarm tracks on the fly when you are recording Simply select the track s in the TCP before you begin recording You are then only ever a single keystroke away from toggling the record status on and off for these tracks If you intend to use these options you should probably disable the option under your recording preferences to Prevent recording from starting when no tracks armed 30 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 7 4 The Xenakios SWS Take Mixer right is a handy little tool especially designed to help you when you are working with a track with multiple takes with the option to Play All Takes enabled Opening this mixer will automatically enable this option Its interface and controls are straightforward It includes pan and volume faders for each take in the example shown there are three takes as well as on the left an overall fader for the track If you work a lot with multiple takes and the option Play All
168. gion 3 We Till The Soil indicated by a marker and a region has Marker 4 We Are The Boys also been made from each track s media ba pesca ele Marker z Samantha s Song item Region z Samantha s Song Each region is named similarly to its corresponding region the main difference being that the marker names all belong with a This is so that REAPER will know where each track begins when the project is burnt to CD The examples below have been chosen not as recommended models but to help you to understand how the formats work Export Format Code Result when Exported and Pasted Comment Comment mndi 1 Brady s Song 0 00 00 Marker count description and 2 Samantha s Song 0 00 00 length 3 We Till The Soil 0 00 00 4 We Are The Boys 0 00 00 Notice The is included with every description there is no punctuation added and the length of each marker is 0 00 00 In this context not too useful really r Track n d I Track 1 Brady s Song 0 02 55 This time we select regions Track 2 Samantha s Song 0 03 27 instead of markers and add Track 3 We Till The Soil 0 02 36 some text and punctuation i Track 4 We Are The Boys 0 03 24 This looks much more like a proper track list If you don t like the space at the start of each line don t leave a space between r and Track in the export format r Track n d I t Track 1 Brady s Song 0 02 55 0 00 00 This time we ve added the Track 2 Saman
169. havior Envelopes Mouse Media MIDI Video A Es Misc Plug ins WOT FewireslS Dx Visualization Fea ote Muted Fs Unlocked Unmuted No Fs Mo notes _ Resampled only Media item icons Locked Hotes Properties Grouped Tint media item peaks to custom track colors Tint media item peaks to custom item colors Tint item background to custom track colors Tink item background to custom item colors Tint tem background even when selected Gap between items on adjacent tracks pimels 10 ee When a custom item color is set use that color for the media item background Gees Preference Option Tint media item peaks to custom track colors Tint item background to custom colors Tint media item peaks to custom item colors Tint media item background to custom item colors Tint item backgrounds even when selected Explanation These two options allow you to choose whether and how to apply by default custom track colors to the media items contained in that track You can choose between their peaks waveforms or their backgrounds or both or neither These two options allow you to choose whether and how to apply custom item colors to your selected media items You can choose between their peaks waveforms or their backgrounds or both or neither If all four of these options are enabled as shown above then where there is any conflict the custom item colors will take precedence If this option is disabled any selected media
170. he required range of tracks or items vy Choose the Set to Color Gradient command from the appropriate SWS Color menu If you have previously defined the color gradient start and end colors then you can omit the first three steps Gradient start color Color ic Gradient stop colo Basic colors Click to change nn Bel Ce F fO Sek custom colors a E m B gq E E Save color set to file Ba fae E E EEEE EEERKE Load color set From File E B Ei Load colors From current thet Custom colors _f Ff ye Ff m E _ ime EEBS Sat 230 Green 61 efine Custom Colors gt gt Colors olid Lum 108 Blue 5 Shown above is the Windows color picker The OSX equivalent is laid out differently but it provides essentially the same functionality 69 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Tutorial 1 With the file StayWithMe63 RPP open right click over any track number in the TCP or MCP and choose the command SWS Track Color Color Management 2 When the Color Management window appears click on the first of the two colors shown to open the standard windows Color window see illustration above to set the gradient start color 3 Use the normal method for selecting a color First click on the required position in the large color palette window then on th
171. hen enabled Closes the SWS Tracklist window if not docked 7 6 Track Visibility Snapshots Track visibility snapshots can be used to store and recall different combinations of track displays both in the TCP and the MCP In this section you will learn how to v Create track visibility snapshots v Recall track visibility snapshots In doing this you will be introduced to the Snapshot Current Track Visibility Recall Snapshot and Show SWS Snapshots commands Tutorial 1 Open the file StayWithMe74 RPP if it is not already open Before proceeding any further we need to set an important option Choose the View SWS Snapshots command to open the Snapshots window Make sure the Prompt for Name option is enabled Close the Snapshots window we ll be returning to look at it again shortly 2 Now make sure the SWS Tracklist window is open and has focus Make sure that Link TCP and MCP Vis is selected 3 Use whichever method you prefer to select the Guitars folder and its four child tracks 4 Hold Ctrl Alt while you click on any TCP or MCP dot in this selection All tracks except Guitar tracks will now be hidden in the TCP and MCP 5 Right click anywhere within the selection to display the Tracklist context menu 87 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 6 Choose Snapshot Current Track
172. hp fAcctID 1374784 SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions Toggle all FXs bypass for selected track s Toggle all FXs online offline for selected track s Toggle FX 1 thru 8 bypass for selected track s Toggle FX 1 thru 8 online offline for selected track s Toggle last FX bypass for selected track s Toggle last FX online offline for selected track s Toggle selected FX bypass for selected track s Toggle selected FX online offline for selected track s Toggle show all envelope window s Toggle show all routing window s Toggle show FX chain window s for selected track s Unbypass all FXs for selected track s Unbypass FX 1 thru 8 for selected track s Unbypass last FX for selected track s Unbypass selected FX for selected track s 12 17 SWS About SWS About 12 18 SWS Tracklist Track Hide Track Show SWS Clear tracklist filter SWS Hide all tracks SWS Hide selected track s SWS Hide selected track s from MCP SWS Hide selected track s from TCP SWS Hide unselected track s SWS Show all tracks SWS Show all tracks in MCP SWS Show all tracks in TCP SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS Show selected track s in MCP Show selected track s in MCP
173. ick again to reverse _Name TCP MCP this sort order Guitar 1 Anne LS auitar 1 Mat You can also drag and drop the column headers left or veel a Hi j i i JICAF qa right to change the order in which they appear nie In the example shown right the Solo and Mute iui columns have been displayed and the tracklist has Reverbs been sorted alphabetically by track name ee Vocals Yox ANNE vox Delay 1 vox Delay 2 wox Mat Yoxverb 7 3 SWS Tracklist Actions A summary list of those SWS actions most closely Filter associated with track list management and track cl visibility is included in Chapter 12 of this User Guide It ae is well worth considering using keyboard shortcuts ink ee ie ie and or menu assignments for those that you find most useful Enable tree item positioning For selected tracks Show MIDI track control For selected tracks Set all tracks to automatic record arn when track selected Show Sv S Tracklist Show Hide Tracks Pow Show selected tracks in track list w Show selected tracks in mixer SWS Show selected track s in MCP hide others SWS Show all tracks in MEF SWS Show selected track s in TCP hide others SWS Show all tracks in TCP ls Set track color to custom color Set track color to random colors Set track color to one random color Set track color to default S5 track color Set track icon Filter visibility by track name B In the example shown here The option to Show SWS Trac
174. ile SWS Project Management menu of the first file 11 Let s now decide that you want to remove one of these relationships 12 Choose the File SWS Project Management command then Delete Related Project A SWS Delete Related Project dialog box will be displayed see below SWS Delete Related Project CeiMathew Brady Project Connaught Rangers Connaught Rangers RPP wo Di Mathew Brady Project Connaught Rangers Connaught Rangers RPP DiiMathew Brady Project Samantha Song Samantha Song RPP DiMathew Brady ProjectiWe Ore The Boys We Ore The Bows RPP Ds iMathew Brady Projectie Till The Soile Till The Soil RPP 13 Select any song from the drop down list then click on OK The project will be removed from the list of related projects The project will of course not be deleted from your hard drive It will still be available to you in exactly the same way as it was before 4 6 Track Management with Related Projects We have REAPER forum member Mercado_Negro to thank for this next example Suppose that in building a project you create a number of tracks that you are not sure that you want to use in your final project One option is to use a related project file to store any that you are currently not using This helps avoid screen clutter and unnecessary file size bloat in the project that you are building Create a special archive file for this purpose For example if the main project file is called Summer RPP call the archive file Summ
175. in the WUTOMODE O RPP file see below VOLPAN 0 92601999896447 0 49000000000000 1 00000000000000 which never changes MUTESOLO O O even if a track is TERASE O I EUS 1 1 BUSCOMP OU renamed or moved to a different position in the SHOWINMIX 1 0 862719 0 000000 1 0 457831 clo 1 track order FREEMODE O SEL O REC OO ad0o0 TRACEKHEIGHT O O 3 If there are then still any source tracks left unmatched then tentative INO O 0 0 O 5000000000 i00 o O 100 destination tracks will be NCHAN 2 picked in order from the FZ 1 destination project TRACKID 8385C244 35D4 469E 9A14 CC1584317948 PFEF 4 Ifthe destination project does not contain any tracks the track destination will be set to create new Of course you can change any of these manually if needs be Two final points to understand are these 1 You are not able to paste snapshot data from more than one source track to the same destination track because to attempt to do so would create two or more mutually contradicting actions If you SWS Snapshot Paste E Filter attempt to do this an error Source track Destination f 1 Yox T3 1 Yox Fred message will be displayed i yox T3 yox Bill ien i i 1 vox T3 a vox Mary In cases such as this nothing will 1 Yox T3 i i Examine track snapshot be pasted into that particular destination track but the other destination tracks will still be create new updated with their snapshot data a S5ave changes
176. ing Tracks from SnapShotsS s sssssessnersnsnsrsrrnnnrrnrnnrnrnnnnsnenrnerenrnrnrnnnrnnrnne 108 6 4 7 Tutorial 7 FX Chains and Snaps ta niece pase entertain abe wie demecnotetssetiaeenatisated 109 8 4 8 Tutorial 8 Visibility Snapshots and Project Changes cccccccsecseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeaes 114 8 4 9 Tutorial 9 Import Export Copy Paste Snapshots Ba SICS cccseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeaeaeaeaes 115 Bo Ee ee Naas IREE aiai 119 8 5 1 Tutorial 10 More Copy Paste SnapShot FUNCTIONS cccecseseceeeeseeseeseeeeseeesneneneaeaneneananenes 120 8 5 2 The Paste Snapshot Inteligence aayetearenvadedivnictadaanesnievepreornieaaaiantiadscsaemererenereenianes 121 8 6 Exporting and Importing Snapshots A Case Studly ccscsscsesecseenearseeensneasoneansesensnearsnsenseesnsneas 122 id a rae IS OS a 123 SS MEd FO dni 125 Or yh Pn AEE E 125 ge Uma Te re Meda POOL 126 10 SVS ReoL ONDOJ oriniai A a AA 131 LLT a AE 131 10 2 ReaConcoie Command SUMINATY irerasicinitrscserstertanteemeertertiieneecineteoatesencsesssesnesceeneeeiaeneetaneneeterereies 132 10 3 Known Issues and LimitationS sssesssesesssnsnsrnrnrnrnrnrnrnsrsrnrnrnrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnrnrnennrnnrrnernnrnnennrnnne 136 10 4 Advanced ReaConsole a oe ene eee nee eee ere 137 e I cp chases ao E A A E E A A sc vd ieee 138 11 More Examples of Custom ACctiOns cccscscsscessssesesenenececseeesesenenensenseseesenenensns 139 LLEF PONI NE ee 1 EEE 1
177. ion Set selection to selected items Set selection to selected items Extend s lection to next transient in selected tems Extend s lection to next transient in selected tems Insert marker Insert marker Reorder marker IDs J Create region from selection Delete all markers Insert time signature marker Show SWS Markerlist Remove all markers from time selection Create region from selection Insert time signature marker Set project tempo from time selection Remove all markers from time selection Create measure from time selection detect tempo Create measure from time selection new time signature Set project tempo from time selection Create measure from time selection detect tempa Crop project to selection Create measure from time selection new time signatur Insert empty space in selection Remove contents of selection moving later terns Crop project to selection Insert empty space in selection Faste D ee ee s slo shin lse m n m leban ee APA A E A E E Click on the text Insert Marker We are going to add a submenu at this point 26 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot 13 Click on the Add button then select Submenu Customized menu 14 When prompted type Smart markers and press Enter Your display should now be similar to that Ue al
178. ions for achieving this end Copy Snapshot Use this if you wish to copy snapshot settings from one open project and into another open snapshot project You do not have to paste all settings into the destination project nor do Paste Snapshot you have to paste settings for all tracks However for those tracks and settings which you do choose to paste the previous project settings will be overwritten Export Snapshot This pair of commands achieves exactly the same ends as Copy and Snapshot and Paste Snapshot but it does so using a SWSSnap settings file Import Snapshot Exporting snapshots to file allows them to be later retrieved imported into other files which may not be currently open In overview the procedure for copying pasting or exporting importing is as follows 1 Display the Snapshots window of the project containing the snapshot whose settings you wish to copy 2 Choose the Copy Snapshot or Export Snapshot command If the latter you will be prompted for a file name Display the Snapshots window for the project into which you want the snapshot settings pasted 4 Depending on what you did at step 2 choose either the Paste Snapshot or Import Snapshot command If the latter you will be prompted to select your SWSSnap file This causes the Snapshot Paste window to be displayed An example of this is shown below next page 5 In the Snapshot Paste window you should do the following Select those source t
179. ith folder management If you filter your actions list using the word folder you should come up with something similar to this Actions Shortcut Description Mixer Clickable icon for folder tracks to show hide children Mixer Toggle folder tracks grouping to left Mixer Toggle show folder tracks in miser Mixer Toggle show icons for the last track in a folder Miner Toggle show tracks in folders in miser Make folder from selected tracks Mute children of selected folder s Select all folder start tracks Select all folders Parents only Select all non folders Select children of selected folder track s Select next folder Select only children of selected folders Select only parent s of selected folder track s Select parent s of selected folder track s Select previous folder Set selected folde s collapsed Set selected folder s small Set selected folders uncollapsed Set selected track s to same folder as previous track Toggle mute of children of selected folder s Unmute children of selected folder s Unselect children of selected folder track s Unselect parent s of selected folder track s Track Cycle selected folder collapsed state Track Cycle selected tracks folder state menakios SWS Dismantl selected folder senakiog SWS Select last track of folder menakiog S S Set selected track s as folder Senakios SWS Suavitch item source file to next APP in folder enako SWS
180. ject to the Following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software 1 4 1 Installing on a PC If you are using a PC with Windows then you can simply double click on the SWS install file to begin the install process THF SOFTWARF TS PROVIDER AS TS WITHOIIT WARRANTY OF AMY ETN C4 cancel You will be presented with a license agreement see right If you are unwilling to accept this agreement you will not be able to install the SW S Extensions If you do consent to this agreement follow the prompts to install the SWS Extensions automatically into your REAPER Plugins folder After installation you will have the file reaper_sws dll in this directory This will ensure that the extensions will automatically be available to you next time you start REAPER After installation you should find that your REAPER main menu will include an extra command Extensions We ll get round to exploring this shortly 1 4 2 Installing on a Mac aoe At tim oo Q DEVICES mf Date Modified Sl osx Oct 26 2009 9 12 PM 4 Ej iDisk Mar 6 2010 5 27 PM Nov 6 2009 8 02 AM Jun 16 2009 12 17 A Nov 6 2009 4 58 PM Feb 26 2010 8 39 Ji reaper auplugins ini reaper install rev txt reaper kb ini reaper license rk SHARED reaper midihw ini E studio reaper recentfx ini i tizmedia reaper reginfo2 ini reaper vstplugins ini
181. just the Harmonica track as its only child 72 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 6 SWS Color Management 5 Immediately above the first of your reverb tracks create another new track and call this Reverbs Make this a folder and ensure that both your reverb tracks are contained within this folder Save the file 6 The file structure should now resemble that shown above previous page 7 Manually select all four folders and only the folders You can do this by holding Ctrl as you click on each in turn 8 Right click over any of the folder names then choose SWS Track Color then Set to Ordered Custom Colors Every folder will be set to a different color 9 Keeping the folders selected right click over any of their names again to again display the context menu 10 This time choose SWS Track Color then Set Children to Same to Same Color Every child track will now be set to the same color as its parent folder as shown on the right 11 Save the file Do not yet close it Note 1 In this example you have worked one step at a time thru the commands required to produce this particular color effect This is a perfect example where creating a custom action macro can be a real time saver A sample macro for this purpose is included in section 6 9 Note 2 This tutorial has demonstrated only one example of how the SWS colo
182. klist has been added to the TCP context menu as has a sub menu Show Hide Tracks Several commands and actions have been appended to this sub menu 83 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 7 4 Working With the SWS Tracklist Window StayWithMe 74 REAPER v3 36pre2 File Edit View Track Options Insert Actions Extensions Help 44 1kHz 24bit WAY Disk 205 GB 8 8ch 1024spls 24 23ms ASIO 21 End 32 Start 1 00 04 1 30 00 2 00 00 j a Re Name vocals Vox 4nne vox Delay 1 vox Delay 2 Vox Mat Gutars Guitar 1 Mat Guitar 2 Mat Guitar 1 Anne Guitar 2 Anne Others Harmonica Reverbs A g i re a YoxV erb 15 media items 7 FX 13 verb MCP Mute Solo ee o amp l ee o amp e of 0 49 454 Playing Rate 1 0 Filter 1 080C 08i 080 08 a i Hide Filtered Tracks i V Link TCP and MCP Vis Toggl Toggl Toggl Sawe Save Save es mini maxi zoom TS 1 T92 TS3 oo Heig Heig Save Rest Toggl Sel Sel out B cume aman Fold TCP MCP TCP MCP EA Zoom Edit For this first example consider the kind of situation which is shown above especially when your project has a fair number of tracks more than in the sample project that accompanies this user guide Notice the floating toolbar in the abo
183. l be the only ones that will be recalled when a snapshot is selected This filter is also applied to new snapshots and saved changes to existing snapshots Hide New Tracks on Vis If this option is enabled then any tracks which may have been added to Recall the project since a snapshot was last saved will not be displayed when a snapshot which includes visibility settings is recalled 8 3 Missing Snapshot Items It s possible that at some time after saving a snapshot you might do some work in REAPER which removes information from the project something which was included in the snapshot If that happens a message similar to that shown on the right will be displayed In this case two tracks E3 that were included in the original T Date New Del Alt click snapshot have since been removed Guitars Onilt 14 03 2010 spam eT este from the project vocals Only 14 03 2010 l proj Reverb 1403 2010 Full Track Mix Choosing Yes will cause the all Tracks 14 03 2010 Current visibility snapshot to be updated with the Snapshot recall error SS appropriate item s removed from it Depending on what the missing item 2 track s from snapshot not Found Delete abandonded items From snapshot You cannot undo this operation is choosing No might give you the opportunity to recreate it manually You might choose No for example if you wanted at this point to undo a track deletion 98 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or
184. levels when the snapshot was created or last saved y To decide which particular track characteristics you want included at any time that an existing snapshot is recalled Obviously only those items which were saved with the snapshot can be recalled For example if a snapshot is saved with track visibility pan and volume levels included then all or any of these as you wish can be included when the snapshot is recalled Those items that were not included when the snapshot was saved in this hypothetical example this would include FX chains and mute solo status could not be restored with the snapshot The following table summarizes the items in the options panel Command Option Action Explanation New button Creates a new mixing snapshot based on a combination of the project s current status and your filter option selections There is no limit on the number of snapshots you can create for any project Prompt for Name If this option is enabled you will be prompted for a name at the time you create a new snapshot If it is disabled the snapshot will be automatically be named something like the word Mix followed by the next available snapshot number e g Mix 5 Show Hide Options button This determines whether the various options including the all important at bottom filter options are displayed or hidden within the Snapshots window The remaining items are all filter options Full Track Mix These three mutually exclusi
185. lu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot Tutorial 1 Open the file StayWithMe23 if it isn t still open from the previous tutorial 2 Add icons suitably labelled to your Zoom Edit toolbar for each of the following actions 8 Note SWS Save time selection slot 1 SWS Save time selection slot 2 SWS Save time selection slot 3 SWS Restore time selection slot 1 SWS Restore time selection slot 2 SWS Restore time selection slot 3 View Zoom time selection View Zoom out project Tegal Toggl Toggi Save Save Sawe Rest Rest Rest mini maxi zoom 5 sad Mec e T52 T53 time a out project ctrl Page Down E FoomfEdit Colours g Envelopes Time Selections Save the toolbar changes and close the Customize Menus Toolbars Window You can now jump quickly and easily between different parts of your song to audition them An example follows Create a time selection from about 28 sec to about 53 sec Click the necessary icon to save this time selection to slot 1 Create a time selection from about 1 min 08 sec to about 1 min 43 sec Click the necessary icon to save this time selection to slot 2 Create a time selection from about 2 min 08 sec to about 2 min 57 sec Click the necessary icon to save this time selection to slot 3 You can now experiment with switching from one time selection to another zooming in and out for any possible editing Note that you can at
186. m s among selected item s Takes Remove empty MIDI take item s among selected item s Takes Remove empty source take item s among selected Takes Select lane from selected item Toggle all FXs except 1 thru 8 bypass for selected track s Toggle all FXs except 1 thru 8 online offline for selected Toggle all FXs except selected bypass for selected track s S amp M_TAKEFXCHAIN1 S amp M_TAKEFXCHAIN8 S amp M_TRACKFXCHAINp1 S amp M_TAKEFXCHAIN1 S amp M_TAKEFXCHAIN8 S amp M_COPYFXCHAIN3 S amp M_COPYFXCHAIN4 S amp M_COPYFXCHAIN7 S amp M_PASTSNDRCV1 S amp M_SENDS5 S amp M_SELFX1 S amp M_SELFX8 S amp M_SELFXNEXT S amp M_SELFXPREV S amp M_FXOFF_SETOFF 1 S amp M_FXOFF_SETOFF8 S amp M_FXOFF_SETON1 S amp M_FXOFF_SETON8 S amp M_FXOFF_SETOFFLAST S amp M_FXOFF_SETONLAST S amp M_FXOFF_SETOFFSEL S amp M_FXOFF_SETONSEL S amp M_SHOWFXCHAIN1 S amp M_SHOWFXCHAINS S amp M_SHOWFXCHAINSEL S amp M_SPLIT1 S amp M_LANETAKE1 S amp M_CLRTAKE1 S amp M_MOVETAKE4 S amp M_MOVETAKE3 S amp M_MOVETAKE2 S amp M_MOVETAKE1 S amp M_DELEMPTYTAKE3 S amp M_DELEMPTYTAKE2 S amp M_DELEMPTYTAKE S amp M_LANETAKE2 S amp M_FXBYPEXCPT1 S amp M_FXBYPEXCPT8 S amp M_FXOFFEXCPT1 S amp M_FXOFFEXCPT8 S amp M_FXBYPEXCPTSEL Toggle all FXs except selected online offline for selected track s S amp M_FXOFFEXCPTSEL For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store p
187. markers on the fly You should understand that keys are bound to the line number in the file not the actual text When adding new commands you should always place them at the end of this file To be on the safe side you are also advised to avoid deleting existing ones 137 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 10 5 SWS Console Actions The following can be assigned as keyboard shortcuts For example if you assign the letter o to SWS Open console with o to solo track s then pressing the letter o in arrangement view or mixer view will cause ReaConsole to be opened with the letter o already typed into it you would then need only to type for yourself the numbers of the tracks that you want soloed SWS Open console SWS Open console and copy keystroke SWS Open console with to add action marker SWS Open console with P to set track s pan SWS Open console with S to select track s SWS Open console with V to set track s volume SWS Open console with a to arm track s SWS Open console with b to prefix track s SWS Open console with c to color track s SWS Open console with f to toggle FX enable SWS Open console with h to flip phase on track s SWS Open console with i to set track s input SWS Open console with l to set track s channels SWS Open console
188. mind are Y Tracks can be referenced by either their number their name or part of their name The table include several examples of this The use of spaces in ReaConsole commands is in most cases significant If in doubt follow the method used in these examples ReaConsole commands use a single character followed by its parameters which may or may not include track names or numbers If you choose not to specify a track name or number the action will be applied to the current track selection For example the command v2 will increase the volume of all tracks currently selected by 2 dB If no track is currently selected this command will have no effect Be careful here For example if you accidentally enter v22 the volume of all selected tracks will be increased by 22 dB If you do use a track name or number the command will be applied to that track For example the command v4 2 will increase the volume of track 4 by 2 dB There are plenty of examples of this type in the table below If you specify a selection of tracks then the command will be applied to all tracks in the selection For example the command v2 5 7 2 will increase the volume of tracks 2 5 and 7 by 2 dB RWS ReaConsole The messages displayed in the ReaConsole window are there to help you Use them to 2 5 7 2 confirm that your command is being interpreted Trim volume on 2 vos Anne S vox Mat 7 Guitar 1 Mat 2db as you wish it to be see example right
189. mitone preserving length clear preserve pitch FNG SWS Increase item rate by 0 6 10 cents preserving length clear preserve pitch FNG SWS Increase item rate by 6 one semitone preserving length clear preserve pitch SWSTL_OPENFILT SWSTL_SNAPSHOT SWSTL_TOGGLE SWSTL_TOGMCP SWSTL_TOGTCP FNG_NUDGERATEDOWN FNG_DECREASERATE FNG_NUDGERATEUP FNG_INCREASERATE 12 20 Xenakios SWS File Management and Manipulation Unfortunately and because of technical difficulties I m not able to include the command strings for the Xenakios actions at the present time I m hoping to be able to rectify this in a future edition Meanwhile you can find these by looking thru REAPER s actions list Xenakios SWS Choose files for random insert Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Choose new source file for selected takes Insert media file from clipboard Insert random file Insert random file at time selection Insert random file at time selection randomize offset Insert random file randomize length Insert random file randomize start offset Insert shuffled random file Open associated REAPER project of item Rename take source file s Rename take s and source file s 12 21 Xenakios SWS Template Management Xenakios SWS Load project template 01 thru 10 Xenakios SWS Lo
190. n 6 2 can individually require much more explanation For the most part their purposes are self explanatory However as is so often the case the key to getting the best out of these commands and actions is to be found in understanding how they can be made to work together There really wouldn t be much benefit in taking you thru a tutorial which selects one track and sets it custom color 1 then another track to custom color 2 and so on That would be far too obvious Instead let s try something much more interesting Tutorial In earlier exercises we ve already looked at tracks and track management Not surprisingly we are returning to this subject here Organising your tracks efficiently and effectively will lay for you the foundation stones of happy project management and mixing To illustrate this point we re going to make some slight changes to the way our sample project file is organised 1 If it is not already open open the file StayWithMe63 RPP Save it as StayWithMe66 RPP 2 Weare going to make some slight changes to this file s structure so that all tracks are contained within folders You ll see why shortly 3 First with the TCP or MCP selected press Ctri A to select all tracks then right click over any track number and choose Set Track Color to Default This gives you a clean slate with which to work 4 Immediately above your Harmonica track create a new track and call it Others Make this a track folder with
191. n of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 4 4 The SWS Project List Window Here is another situation to consider Just because a file is included in a project list that does not mean that you have to open the entire group every time you wish to work with that file You can still use the normal File Open Project command any time that you wish to work with the file by itself Now consider this Perhaps you are working with one or two files open both of which are also included in a project list Perhaps you make some change to one file that you want to copy to one or more of the other projects in the list This could for example be the addition of some effect of effects to a particular track s FX chain That s an example of where the SWS Project List window can come in handy You can open this using the File SWS Project Management SWS Project List command or by assigning a keyboard shortcut or toolbar icon to the action SWS Open Project List Once open this window which can be docked or floated as you wish can be used for easier project list management SVS Project List Name Path 1 Shay wWwithMez De Reaper ProjectsiSW 5 User Guide projects Stay WithMe z Stay withMez73 D Reaper Projects 5W5 User Guide nroierksiSkawwikhMe Save list of open projects Syan projects From list Dock Project List in Docker Close Window An
192. n project folder media to project Where a search for missing files is successful you will be folder presented with the option of having these copied into the project folder for this project Show only unused files Enabling this option causes only those files in the current project folder but which are not used by that project to be listed in the right hand pane Delete selected files Causes any files that you select from the right hand pane to be deleted from your hard disk Send selected to Recycle Bin Causes any files that you select from the right hand pane to be sent to your recycle bin 24 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot 2 6 Smart Marker Actions Later in this guide we ll be looking at the SWS Marker List Manager Meanwhile in this section you will be introduced to one very handy SWS marker management feature the ability to create smart markers that can themselves be made to execute other commands and actions An example of this might be when you are auditioning a song Perhaps there are two or three passages on which you wish to focus comparing the mix at these different places This might be for example to help you introduce subtle variations in the way a repeated chorus is mixed in two or three different places The use of smart markers or action markers
193. napshot Reverb Recall snapshot Vocals Only Recall snapshot All Tracks Show all tracks 15 You can now use the SWS Tracklist right click menu to switch quickly and easily between viewing your different snapshots see right 10 Som on E oo Be 16 Let s dig a bit deeper and see what s really been going on here 17 Right click over the SWS Tracklist window and SWS Snapshots 18 19 20 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 choose Show SWS Snapshots from the context menu 4 Mame All Tracks Guitars Only Reverb The Snapshots window Vocals Only shown right will be displayed Go easy here The SWS Snapshots module is extraordinarily powerful and needs to be approached methodically We ll do this in Chapter 8 For this tutorial please keep on track and stick to visibility snapshots only Click once on any Snapshot name to select Show Options gt Date 13 03 2010 13 03 2010 13 03 2010 13 03 2010 Time 10 50 AM a09 PM 10 49 AM 10 49 AM it thereby changing your track display When you have finished experimenting save the file 88 7 SWS Tracklist and Track Management 7 7 REAPER Track View Screen Sets It is easy to get confused as to how the SWS Tracklist manager with its Track Visibility Snapshots and REAPER itself with its own native Track View Screen Sets work together
194. nds the correct tracks for us in the current project Hey presto instant drum mix Well almost Notice that when you do this your original drum track settings will be overwritten with the imported ones If you wish to be able to easily restore them at some later time then you should preferably save these as a snapshot before importing the SWSSnap file You can also use the Undo History for this 122 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 8 7 SWS Snapshot Custom Actions The available SWS Mixing Snapshot actions are listed in Chapter 12 In particular you might wish to consider assigning a keyboard shortcut or toolbar icon to SWS Open Snapshot Window The actions SWS Recall Snapshot 1 thru SWS Recall Snapshot n are self explanatory where n will be 10 or the highest snapshot number in the current project file whichever is the greater They can be assigned to shortcut keys to recall your snapshots even when the Snapshots window is closed or not visible You also might wish to consider making some snapshot custom action macros For example suppose that you often need to create a snapshot containing all FX settings for a project or all volume or pan settings These tasks could be automated by macros similar to these FX Settings Snapshot Macro SWS Save current snapshot filter options SWS Clear all snapshot filter options SWS
195. ne 14 Ohead S reeee Phone L Phone R master parent 9 Wandalin 10 master output T GuitarBectic 2 Bass SRR ee PEE Jone BOC DOG SISO 00 ae HOSS Sb Heese CECE a n Routing Grouping Matrix A destination R ng Dut S76 L Oelta 1010 J Out 6 R Delta 1010 HRHRRRTATnAuTmEnTAN E nalog 0 iWitarAcoustic Percussiontix he la la master parent itarshyim 3 Ohead1 14 Ohead RiEBERPRERERRE Sea Phone L Phone R 9 bandolin 10 4 Guitarshix 5 master output 1 vould B GuttarAcoustic T GuitarBectnic amp Bass Ei E C T eT T E TT DATTA Sees TATEN PARTCTATANE ZEE eee eakeea bin L tin F GSR SER hSeSsE aaa Analog Out 6 L Delta 1010 a a a HRB Seas OE SAnn Sena owns 45 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 46 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 4 SWS Project Management 4 SWS Project Management The SWS Extension set provides you with a whole set of useful commands of actions designed to help you whenever you have a number of REAPER project RPP files that belong together as a set This might be the case for example where you have four or five songs that are being recorded for a demo CD or where you are experimenting with perhaps two or three different a
196. ne of three categories vy Actions whose purpose makes sense to you and which you might want to consider using either alone or as part of a custom macro v Actions whose purpose makes sense to you but for which you do not believe you would have any use v Actions whose purpose you simply do not understand Don t be concerned about this No two people s exact needs are identical Often an action that will be important for one person will be of no use to another Don t expect to be able to know everything at once The actions are grouped by topic and listed in two columns column 1 being the action as you will find it in the actions list column 2 being the command string such as you might wish to use for example in command markers Important note for OSX Users At the time of writing this some actions are not available within the OSX version of REAPER These include any that refer to the recycle bin known in the OSX environment as trash and any others that have been marked with a double asterisk 12 1 SWS Autocolor and Coloring Actions SWS Apply auto coloring SWSAUTOCOLOR_APPLY SWS Open auto color window SWSAUTOCOLOR_OPEN SWS Toggle auto coloring enable SWSAUTOCOLOR_ENABLE To avoid unnecessary repetition commands referring to custom color numbers slot numbers etc have been expressed in this format SWS Set selected track s to custom color 1 thru 16 This means that there are sixteen similar commands on
197. neneonearenecnsaeasonearsuscnsusarsueansennsneates 65 5 8 2 Customizable COI WG in cask dcdtccestaceinsasasacassaccaaednitrieerrerniicdiniie nee 65 Se Me Be Ome png D yy aranea EA 65 Ss Bea in at on 0 re ee ee eee eee ee 65 5 9 Marker Management Custom Actions ANd Ma CTrOS cccccscceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeseaeaeaeaeaeeseseneges 66 6 SWS Color ManaGeMent cscscscecesesssesenenenensceeeesenenensneeeeeseeuenensaeeeseseeneneneseesnaeas 67 6 1 The SWS Color Management SSC sstescncvavevaseescebptpepipenteieevasasetssasatesoasnenssanareeniniawenmenasieeraiens 67 6 2 SWS Color Management Command SUMMA ccsccecseencsreneasceceeneansneessncarsnecnseeersneneneseneneas 68 6 3 Available Color Management FOLIOS isisirunisdsisdsdseesi eines 69 a a E aa E EEEE eueeremtuania 69 cree AI I E E E E E E A EE A A R E 7i a T I A 72 6 7 REAPER s Color Tinting Fare rare aierarterereeaee eerie 74 Cea O aE eenersterncbeiseaesesaes eee aaeeIA 76 oe a Pier EA N TR 77 Baere O ge Ss E nan 77 PRA Tre Sa o gte s Oea o T T E A A A EE EEEE thei see 78 ee LEa e go eral ASETA A ese eee 78 6 9 Color Management Custom FOG oases dacs ected ie 79 SRN EO rae Oe fe alo A ane ea ep mee once ert see oO mene ter E RRR re MEMS ea 80 7 SWS Tracklist and Track ManagGement cccscccscsenensnsceseseeeneneesseenenseseeeneneeseanaes 1 Pole Fee Ge ana oer erence eens 82 72 SWS Tracklist Column ad Te cence cit cca cnccanaaceeeenecernvesenersusntadedesanaerse
198. ng the option Do Not Process Muted Tracks Custom actions like this are at their most powerful when used in conjunction with the SWS Tracklist Manager which we ll get to in Chapter 7 Meanwhile you should be aware of the following simple action in case you need to restore any archived tracks to your projects SWS Show all tracks You can then unmute restore FX etc on those tracks that you have brought back into view and wish to now bring back into your project Of course you could do this manually or you could create an unarchive custom macro to do this Unarchive Tracks Macro Track Unmute selected tracks SWS Unmute all sends from selected track s SWS Unmute all receives for selected track s Track Set all FX online for selected tracks Track Unselect all tracks 44 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 3 Building Simple Custom Action Macros One potential problem with archiving tracks is that you can easily forget what is and isn t there Happily one way of keeping on top of this is to use the routing matrix Shown below is the routing matrix for a particular project with track 10 to track 14 archived top and unarchived bottom Routing Grouping Matrix owns I destination pusti 1 H ne it S68 L Delta 1010 a a i a a i i i R q Out 6 L Delta 1010 J Gur S A Delta 1010 Percussiontix 3 Ohead
199. nica 2 track the dialog box suggests one for you In this case its suggestion that we paste this information to our Vocals folder is obviously not what we want l l a SWS Snapshot Past 7 Right click over the last item in the destination a column to display a context menu We can choose Source track Destination any other existing track as our destination track if 11 Others 11 Others 12 Harmonica 1 lz 13 Harmonica 2 l v we wish or none or specify that we want the data pasted to anew track In this case New Track is what we want Examine track snapshot 8 You might have noticed that this same context menu includes an option to Examine Track none Snapshot This can be quite useful if you need to master check on exactly what snapshot data is available Mi ete to be pasted see below right 2 Vox Anne 9 This time leave the filter and save changes option exactly as shown in the screenshot on the previous page We will not be creating a new snapshot in the Source track Destination destination file 11 Others 11 Others 12 Harmonica 1 12 Harmonica 10 Click on OK 13 Harmonica 2 create new 11 You should be able to see that the new Track Snapshot Details track Harmonica 2 has been pasted ETE AT into the destination project Because it a N A S E has been added to the end of the Pan 25 right project we have just a little work to do Dees Fx bypass off 12 In the TCP drag and dro
200. nnernnnnnennnnnne 13 OU ye nthe p EET ee en een en ener E E rece eee nts an ater rs ee nes E ete er ee 13 Lee Calg i Sees deter Beer er eee aa 13 1 5 REAPER Actions Keymaps and Custom MeMuS ccsccscsccecsececercneanseessoneatsneesansenensaseensasneraranaes 14 Ee PANN tl EAE EA 14 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a LOt c cssssssssssessseesesessseeseneeees 15 d PPE er ee aid Ie INE naa a wi caccedeusacted sans dae 15 ke NNE gs a ole ale SNS AIONE ae eee Oe nee ee eee ee Seen eee eee eee eee 15 2 3 Zoom Display and Navigation ACtiONS cccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeaeeesaeeeeaeaeaeaeeseseeeeeeeeeaeanagas 16 PEO aoi SY Fa e E A E renee 20 2 9 A First Look at Xernakios a 4 7 ee re a ee nnen aranairad iina eee 21 2 5 1 Extension Command Parameters csccccsccecsecnceececeecncarcnsescnenecneassnsneceessoneatsnseecnsassnatananas 22 2 5 2 Show Hide Floating Item Track INfOrmMation cccscsecscceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeueeeauseesesaesesaususansesaneras 23 2 5 3 The Project Media Files WinGOW c csscscsscsececsecneaesnceecneasneansnessonearsnsenseeassnsersusnseeatanstes 24 2 6 Smart Marker FONG sasasasscsicassanivncsaveccesdacassaceenesacerbessrsrennstiriaacianisn eae 25 2 7 SOS More Examples of Simple ACU OS icssciaicsisceicsinesanacevesanunsdecssuiuenduevaneetensseeudendiseneaiacineas 29 E T EE E A EAA 29 dJ em States and ten Previa Wisiri iniaa n aaa EEEE 29 2 7 3 Actions to Assist with Recording
201. ny one of five previously saved item selections on slot 1 thru slot 5 a per track basis 2 7 2 Item States and Item Preview These actions can be useful if you are experimenting with making changes to an item s various attributes and want to be able to recover a saved state without having to undo any other unrelated actions that have taken place since the state was saved Currently the item state actions work only with an item s mute status volume including item volume handle free item positioning status and size color and fades Actions Comments Save Restore selected track s items Saves or restores item states for all items in the selected states track s Save Restore selected track s selected Saves or restores item states for only those items currently items states selected in the selected track s Select item s with saved states on Selects all items on selected tracks whose item states have selected tracks previously been saved Preview selected media item and These actions can be used to play back and listen to the Preview selected media item toggle currently selected media item Useful when you are Play selected item s once experimenting with changes to an item s properties or FX 29 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 2 7 3 Actions to
202. o do this on an experimental basis and without compromising your existing settings in these areas then before you begin work on these exercises you first should backup and save all your existing menus toolbars and shortcuts You can later recall them if you wish To do this vy Choose from the main REAPER menu Options Customize Menus Toolbars When the Customize window is shown click on Export then All menus toolbars to ReaperMenuSet file When prompted give the file a name and click on Save These settings can then be imported back into REAPER at any time Close the Customize window when finished v Choose from the main REAPER menu Actions Action List When the Actions window is opened click on Import Export then choose Export All Specify a name for your KeyMap file and click on Save This file can be imported back into the Actions List at any time Close the Actions window when finished Then as you work thru this User Guide you can at any time save the toolbars menus and keymaps that you have created during the tutorials and restore your earlier saved settings if you wish Switching between the two sets of menus toolbars and keymaps is a lot quicker and easier than you might think 1 6 Assumed Knowledge This User Guide is not recommended for complete newcomers either to digital recording or to REAPER That said you don t need to be a power user of REAPER to benefit from its contents However the better your knowledge and the great
203. o ordered custom colors SWS Set selected track s children to same color Track Unselect all tracks This variation of the first macro works in a similar way except that for each folder it will make a random rather than sequential selection from the current 16 color set The child tracks will then be set to the same color as their parent folders SWS Select all folders parents only SWS Set selected track s to random custom colors SWS Set selected track s children to same color Track Unselect all tracks If you wish you could add these two actions to either or both of these macros as follows the first at the very beginning the second at the very end SWS Save current track selection SWS Restore saved track selection This would have the effect of ensuring that any track or tracks that were selected at the time the macro was executed would be reselected after the colors had been applied Match Item Colors to Track Colors Macros This macro replicates the last example used in Section 6 6 It will change the colors of all media items to ensure that they are synchronised with their respective track colors in the TCP and MCP It will do so without losing any current item selection SWS Save selected item s Item Select all items SWS Set selected item s to respective track color SWS Restore saved selected item s 79 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu
204. of markers when working with different tracks or groups of tracks Delete Marker Set Displays the Delete Marker Set prompt for you to select any previously saved marker set to be deleted Copy marker set to clipboard Copies all current markers into the Windows clipboard These can be pasted into another REAPER project if you wish This can be useful for example if you have more than one project file all of which are different versions of the same project Paste marker set from clipboard Pastes into the current project all markers previously copied into the Windows clipboard Reorder marker IDs Renumbers all currently displayed markers from left to right You should definitely consider either using the Action List Editor to assign a keyboard shortcut to this one or adding it to the Ruler Arrange context menu Reorder region IDs Renumbers all currently displayed regions from left to right Delete all markers Deletes all currently displayed markers but does not affect the contents of saved marker sets Delete all regions Deletes all currently displayed regions Export track list to clipboard Exports track list Track list format Lets you specify which information is to be included when the list is exported to the clipboard Dock Marker List in Docker Docks the Marker List window in the REAPER docker 57 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php
205. of the overall takes mix so that the male vocal mixes well with the rest of the song Save the file 31 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 In addition to the Take Mixer a number of potentially handy actions that you may wish to consider using include the following They are all available from the media item right click context menu Remember that you can assign keyboard shortcuts for any that you find especially useful Actions Comments Nudge active take volume up down Adjusts volume of current active take Pan takes of items symmetrically Automatically pans takes to create a symmetrical pattern For example for an item with three takes these will be panned 100 left dead center and 100 right respectively Store recall currently selected takes Use this when a track with multiple takes has been sliced so that you can select the best take for each item You can save a selection of takes then experiment with making changes At any time you can now recall your saved take selection Rename takes A quick and easy way of renaming a take without having to open and navigate the Item Properties window Select first take in selected items Select last take in selected items Select takes of selected items cyclically Suppose that you have say
206. oject Files in project folder File name Used Status File name Used in proj D Aeaper Projects aint ht Funny os 01 00 way 1 Online D Reaper Projects aint lt Funny aint it Funny APP Ho D Reaper Projects 4int lt Funnet Body NT1000 00 waw 1 Online D Reaper Projects 4int It Funnin F unn mpa Ho D Reaper Projects 4int lt Funnet Neck 63 00 way 1 Online D Reaper Projects W4int lt FurnngGtr Body WT 1 000 00 way es D Reaper Projects 4int lt Funnysox 01 01 way 1 Online D Reaper Projects 4int lt FunnysGtr Body NT 1000 07 way es D Reaper Projects 4int lt FunnysGtr Body NTIO00 01 way 1 Online D Reaper Projecten lt FunnyGtr Weck 63 00 way es D Aeaper Projects 4int lt FurnnyGtr Weck 63 01 way 1 Online D Reaper Projects4int lt Funny Gtr Weck 63 07 way Tes D Reaper Projects W4int lt Furr os C1 00 way Yez D Reaper Projects V4int It Funny os C1 01 waw es Find missing files C Show only unused files Send selected to Recycle bin The left hand pane of this window lists all files used by the current project the right hand pane lists all files in the project folder together with an indication of whether or not each file is used in the current project Options and features include Item Explanation Hide file paths Simplifies the display by showing the file names only without the full path Find missing files Searches your hard drive s for any media files missing from this project Copy no
207. olume 1dB down Nudge master volume 1dB up Pan takes of item symmetrically Play selected item s once Preview selected media item Preview selected media item toggle Process item with Rubberband Process item with csound phase vocoder Randomize item positions Remap item positions Remove muted items Reposition selected item s Resample pitch shift item one semitone down Resample pitch shift item one semitone up Reset item length and media offset Reset item volume to 0 0 Reverse order of selected item s Save item as audio file Scale item positions lengths by static percentage Select first item s of selected track s Select items to end of track Select items to start of track Select items under edit cursor on selected track s Set fades of selected item s to 0 0 Set fades of selected item s to configuration A Set fades of selected item s to configuration B Set fades of selected item s to configuration C Set fades of selected item s to configuration D Set fades of selected item s to configuration E Set fades of selected item s to configuration F Set item fades to autofade lengths Set item pitch based on item playrate Set item playrate based on item pitch and reset pitch Set item rate to 1 0 and pitch to 0 0 Set next fade in shape for items 157 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 Xenakios SWS
208. olumns are displayed and in what order and sort the snapshots list by any column The Snapshots List Area This occupies the largest part of the window Here is where your Snapshots are listed It has its own context menus as well as various mouse and keyboard controls The Options Panel Located to the right this is where you can execute some of the most important including creating new snapshots and defining snapshot filters Do not be concerned if this does not mean very much to you at present We ll shortly get to some examples which should help you but first largely for future reference purposes let s look at each of these three component areas in some detail 93 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 8 1 The Snapshots List Area This area displays your list of current snapshots It does of course do much more than just that Sort Snapshot List Click on any column header to sort by that column Click again to reverse the sort order Change Column Order Drag and drop column headers left or gna 7 177 1171 rrr right r Hide Display Column Right click over column headers to open AEE context menu then select the column you wish to hide display Restore Default Column Right click over column headers and Display choose Reset Save Snapshot Ctri Click on Snapshot
209. ommands are not toggles 19 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Don t make the mistake of thinking of the SWS extensions as being a separate self contained module within REAPER On the contrary they are most useful when they are integrated with REAPER s native actions In the example below two more actions have been added to our Zoom Edit toolbar these are REAPER s native actions View Toggle Track View to Minimum Height and View Toggle Track to Maximum Height see below Teggl Toggi Toggi mini maxi zoom Toda minimum height fon gt zoom Edit d a Envelop 5 j Ime Sele i0Ns 2 4 Loop and Time Selection Actions The SWS Extensions include a number of handy actions for saving and recalling different loop and time selections In this next section you ll see some examples of how useful these can be If you filter your Actions list using the words SWS Loop you will see upwards of about 12 or 15 actions including several Xenakios SWS actions Filtering with the words SWS Time Sel will yield a similar result The table below summarises the main actions Actions Comments Save loop selection slot 1 thru slot 5 Saves up to five different loop selections for the project so that any of these can be recalled at will Restore loop selection slot 1 th
210. on loaded 04 08 10 09 09 28 Close Fs Chain Config 040610 08 46 54 This will ensure that if you make any serious Reorder EX Chain nd 08 10 08 46 59 errors you can always recover your project file Fx Bypass Toggle 04 08 10 08 46 51 from an earlier state Add Fs To Chain 04 06 10 08 46 50 ee d 11 2 1 Freeze Tracks in Folder The following is a simple macro designed to freeze any selected folder together with its child tracks It is not intended as a model that will serve you in every possible circumstance rather as an example to help you understand how freeze macros are constructed and how they work There are two main strategies that you can use for freezing tracks One is to render them to new tracks then set FX off line for mute and hide the original tracks The other is to render them as new takes on their existing tracks Our example takes the latter approach This example will work for example with the folders in the project files used in the tutorials in this user guide However special attention would need to be paid to the vocal track because one track the male vocal has Play all takes enabled SWS Save current track selection SWS Select only children of selected folder track s Item Select all items in selected tracks SWS Select only track s with items Item Render items to new take 141 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctI
211. only Show selected track s in MCP hide others Show selected track s in TCP Show selected track s in TCP and MCP Show selected track s in TCP only Show selected track s in TCP hide others Show selected track s hide others Show Tracklist 153 S amp M_FXBYPALL S amp M_FXOFFALL S amp M_FXBYP1 S amp M_FXBYP8 S amp M_FXOFF1 S amp M_FXOFF8 S amp M_FXBYPLAST S amp M_FXOFFLAST S amp M_FXBYPSEL S amp M_FXOFFSEL S amp M_WNTGL2 S amp M_WNTGL1 S amp M_WNTGL3 S amp M_FXBYPALL3 S amp M_FXBYP_SETOFF1 S amp M_FXBYP_SETOFF8 S amp M_FXBYP_SETOFFLAST S amp M_FXBYP_SETOFFSEL SWS_ABOUT SWSTL_CLEARFLT SWSTL_HIDEALL SWSTL_HIDE SWSTL_HIDEMCP SWSTL_HIDETCP SWSTL_HIDEUNSEL SWSTL_SHOWALL SWSTL_SHOWALLMCP SWSTL_SHOWALLTCP SWSTL_SHOWMCP SWSTL_MCPONLY SWSTL_SHOWMCPEX SWSTL_SHOWTCP SWSTL_BOTH SWSTL_TCPONLY SWSTL_SHOWTCPEX SWSTL_SHOWEX SWSTL_OPEN For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 SWS Show Tracklist with filter focused SWS Snapshot current track visibility SWS Toggle selected track s fully visible hidden SWS Toggle selected track s visible in MCP SWS Toggle selected track s visible in TCP 12 19 Fingers SWS Item Rate Actions FNG SWS Decrease item rate by 0 6 10 cents preserving length clear preserve pitch FNG SWS Decrease item rate by 6 one se
212. ontroller mappings a Raise the envelope segment after 2 min 47 so that it sits at 2 0 dB This will cause the fader to move slowly from 1 dB to 2 dB over the 37 seconds between the two nodes Hold Ctrl while you click on Full Mix 1 to save this into the snapshot Press Ctrl S to save the file Now select Full Mix 2 The Exciter and its envelope should disappear We can import it back into this Snapshot from Full Mix 1 In the Filter area of the Snapshots window select Custom and ensure that the only enabled filter is FX Chain Make sure that both Filter on Recall and Selected Tracks Only are enabled Make sure that in the TCP and or MCP the Reverbs bus is selected Click on Full Mix 1 The Exciter with its settings and envelopes will be added to your mix In the Snapshots window select Full Track Mix and disable both Filter on Recall and Selected Tracks Only Hold Ctrl while you click on the text Full Mix 2 This snapshot is now saved with the Exciter and its envelope Save the file Hold Shift Ctrl while dragging the first envelope node back to 1 min 40 sec 113 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 16 Raise the last part of this envelope from 2 dB to 2 5 dB 17 Hold Ctrl while clicking on the snapshot name Full Mix 2 to save the snapshot Save the file 18 Play the file switching bet
213. open the file StayWithMe273 RPP 50 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 4 SWS Project Management 12 Now give the command File SWS Project Management Save List of Open Projects Select StayWithMeFiles and click on Save When prompted choose Yes to overwrite the old list 13 Now if you close all files then open the projects from the list all four project files will be opened This feature opens up staggering possibilities for you when you are building and mixing your projects Here are just some of the options open to you v Each project in the group of files will retain its own separate Undo History which can be loaded and saved with the files This offers you almost limitless flexibility to experiment v You can copy and paste between files open in different tabs For example you can copy FX complete with their settings or complete FX chains from one open project to another v You can use different track screen sets with different files if you wish v Youcan use different play rates on different files and compare them to see which you prefer v You can use different effects or the same effects on different flies in the group as you wish You can then use different automation different envelopes different parameter modulation and so on in the different projects Finally to complete the tutorial 15 Add another new project tab
214. opened by choosing the View SWS ReaConsole command from the main REAPER window or by pressing the default keyboard shortcut C SWS ReaConsole Enter 4 command The first thing that you notice about ReaConsole is that there really isn t very much to notice right All there is to see is an absurdly simple dialog box with just one edit line and a solitary prompt Enter a command You could be forgiven for thinking Not much happening here closing it and moving on without giving it another thought You could be forgiven but at the same time you d have no idea of what you were missing 10 1 Introducing ReaConsole What can you use ReaConsole for It would probably be easier and quicker to say what you can t use ReaConsole for In essence it is a complete and comprehensive track management tool Here are some of its applications and uses You can use it as a very flexible and responsive one stop center for selecting tracks soloing and muting tracks adjusting their pan and or volume settings arming tracks for recording assigning inputs and more You can even rename tracks create multiple track channels and change track colors all from within that harmless looking interface Before exploring the many capabilities of ReaConsole in depth let s have a very quick look at it to see how it works As you might have guessed ReaConsole is very different from the other SWS modules Instead of being driven by context men
215. otice that each will sound very different Of course you could try out as many different mixes as you like 20 If you like right click over one of the snapshots and choose Show Snapshot Details as shown above previous page The entire contents of the snapshot are displayed For more about this see Checkpoint below Checkpoint Before moving on to the next tutorial it s important that you make sure you really understand what you have done here with your two snapshots Full Mix 1 and Full Mix 2 It isn t difficult but there are two important facts that you need to understand e Because you selected the option Full Track Mix when creating your snapshots all of the relevant mix information is included in the snapshot This includes volume and pan levels details of sends FX chains and so on including the mute solo status of all tracks However the only differences between the settings of these two mixes are differences in dome of the volume and pan settings For that reason these are the only things that change when you switch between these tow mixing snapshots In the next couple of tutorials we are going to look at how filters can be used selectively in mixing Snapshots to achieve greater precision 8 4 2 Tutorial 2 Understanding Snapshot Filters In this next example the main thing you will learn is how filters can be applied selectively when recalling snapshots There s a bit more to understand here than at first meets the
216. ou both SWS actions and those native to REAPER SWS Open marker list toggles showing the marker list window SWS Load marker set SWS Save marker set SWS Delete marker set SWS Copy marker set to clipboard SWS Copy markers in time selection to clipboard relative to selection start SWS Paste marker set from clipboard SWS Reorder marker IDs SWS Delete all markers SWS Delete all regions SWS Export formatted marker list to clipboard SWS Tracklist format SWS Select next region SWS Select previous region Locking Set marker locking mode Locking Clear marker locking mode Item Split selected items at project markers Markers Add move marker 1 thru 10 to play edit cursor Markers Go to marker 1 thru 10 Markers Go to next marker project end Markers Go to previous marker project start Markers Insert marker at current position Markers Insert and or edit marker at current position Markers Insert region from time selection Markers Renumber all markers in timeline order Markers Edit marker near cursor Markers Edit region near cursor Do not forget that any of these actions can be assigned to shortcuts Or toolbars or Remove selection ESC added to REAPER menus as zoom selection Ctr Fage Up shown right Set selection to selected items Extend selection to next transient in selected items They can also be combined y into custom actions or Smart markers macros We ll have more to Dae alte say a
217. ox Delay 1 7 Right click over the Sends 1 label and choose No sends Overwrite Snapshot Track 4 Vox Delay 2 Mo sends 8 With Sends 1 still selected click on New and create another new send called Sends 2 At this stage this is an exact copy of Sends 1 9 With Sends 2 selected open the I O window for VoxVerb Increase the send Volume level by 1 0 dB 10 Open the Receives window for the Vox Delay 1 track Set the Volume faders on both Receives to about 1 5 dB and set the pan faders to 67 right and left respectively SWS Snapshots Del Alt click 11 Open the Receives window as ator i hegal Save Ctrkcick Delay and Reverb 18 03 2010 3 19 PM Filter for Vox Delay 2 and set Full Mix 1 15 03 2010 1 32 PM ea both Volume faders to about Full Mix 2 18 03 2010 1 37 PM A a 0 5 dB Full Mix 3 19 03 2010 757 AM b Current visibility Initial Project 16 03 2010 1 30 PM custom ahtcli Sends 1 19 03 2010 6 52 AM 12 Right click over the label Sends 2 19032010 9 02 AM Pan M volume Sends 2 and choose he e Mute v Fx Chain Overwrite Snapshot from Solo v Sends the context menu is Selection 13 Save the file Filter on Recall 14 You can now play the file Selected Tracks Only using any of your Full Mix Snapshots at the same time PU ee Pe switching between the two snapshots Sends 1 and Sends 2 to see which you prefer 105 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to h
218. p the fa eee Harmonica 2 track up so that it sits in 35 Delay delay_chorus the Others folder just after Harmonica 1 No sends 13 To add the media item to the new Harmonica 2 track you could in this example copy and paste it either from the file StayWithMe84591 or from the Harmonica 1 track in StayWithMe4592 14 When you have done this save the file It should now include the tracks shown on the right Note We have not yet looked at the Delete Snapshot command so let s just mention it now It s simple enough if you right click over any snapshot name and choose Delete Project it will delete it from the current snapshot If you do this other snapshots will not be renumbered For example if you have four snapshots numbered 1 2 3 and 4 and then delete snapshot 3 then you will be left with three snapshots numbered 1 2 and 4 This might seem strange at first but it brings one significant benefit If you have any custom actions or keyboard shortcuts allocated to recalling any snapshots by their snapshot number then the integrity of those actions will not be compromised 118 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 8 5 The TCP Context Menu _ r w Track grouping enabled Show master in track view Ctr Alt M SWS Snapshots E y Show snapshots list and settings Extensions Tracki Mixeri Envelopes i 4
219. peog l Track view Windows gad La T B aam im 4 Mame Load key Save kep Full Project Min F4 Alt S Hift F 7 Full Project show Us F5 Alt S hil 30 secs with Us FE Alt S hitt F a 30 secs Min height Alt S hift F 4 Del Alt click Mame Date Time New Save Ctrl click 1 Guitars Only 13 03 2010 10 46 AM Filter 2 Vocals Only 13 03 2010 10 49 AM 1303 2010 10 49 AM Q Full Track Mix Current Visibility Custom pan olurne L Mute v FX Chain S5ola Sends vis Selection Filter on Recall Selected Tracks Only Prompt For Mame Hide Wew Tracks on Vis Recall lt Hide Options 10 Now select the snapshot Vocals Only Only the five vocal tracks including the folder will now be displayed in both the TCP and the MCP 90 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 7 SWS Tracklist and Track Management 11 Before proceeding any further notice a slight inconsistency of interface that you will have to live with It s no big deal to select a Track View screen set you need to double click on its name in the screen sets window To select a snapshot however you should click only once on its name in the snapshots window double clicking is used to edit the snapshot name 12 Click once on Guitars Only to select this snapshot Now only the guitar tracks are visible in both TCP and MCP
220. ple project files download cccccccccccccccesneeeeeeeeeees 12 Save list of all open projects c cccccccccecccceeseteneeeteeeaese ese 49 Save Makr SCU cc 3 asa EEE NEA i Select and Recall Snapshot cccc ccc ccccccccccccceeeeeeeseeeeeees 94 Sends actions fOr MANAGING cccececcccccccceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeees 34 Set children to same Color sa c ccccccce ene 68 Set to random custom COLL cccceceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 68 Set to Color gradient maea ect hh at eee 68 Set 10 CUSTIOND COlOP evene n E S 68 Set to one random Custom COlOL ccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 68 Set to ordered custom COIOTS ceeeeeeeeseeeeeeceeeaeeeneeeeeees 68 Set to ordered custom colors per track 68 Setyo ume csi acd essen ANAN eu denas 133 shortcut keys assigning tO actiONS ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 16 SHOW AM ACS fe sessed eit iad tnd a ai alcm cease aici 82 Show in Both MCP and TCP cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeees 82 show Only an MCPs slesccezczencnancut accancet ocean ua soatssoooeiale 82 Slows Oly tC Peek RTA 82 Show RecentA CONS aerie a atari 18 Shows WS Snapshots ana ieceri ek 82 SiMe ACTIONS hile te Ree i ess Sess A ale 15 smart marker actions 41 61 ede ails tai eels 25 SNAAKS ieo ca coca es as eaa EE oeteiede ee ore 28 STAPSHOL ACTIONS se ceca a e e E aauen te 123 Snapshot Current Visibility icce aa 82 Snapshot Custom MacrioS cccccccccscsccscsccccceceeeseeseeseeeees 123 Snapshot Details
221. pshot solo Toggle snapshot visibility Toggle snapshot vol 12 16 SWS S amp M FXChain and Cue Routing SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M SWS S amp M Bypass all FXs for selected track s Bypass FX 1 thru 8 for selected track s Bypass last FX bypass for selected track s Bypass selected FX bypass for selected track s Clear FX chain for selected item s Clear FX chain for selected item s all takes Clear FX chain for selected track s Clear FX chain slot Close all envelope window s Close all floating FX window s Close all FX chain window s Close all routing window s Copy FX chain from selected item Copy FX chain from selected track Copy tracks with routing Create cue bus track from track selection prompt Create cue bus track from track selection Post Fader Post Pan Create cue bus track from track selection Pre Fader Post FX Create cue bus track from track selection Pre FX Cut FX chain from selected item Cut FX chain from selected track Cut tracks with routing Float FX 1 thru 8 window for selected track s Float selected FX window for selected track s
222. r 8 Click on Save then Close to close the menu toolbar 4 editor Your floating toolbar should now be similar to that shown below Of course your other three tabs will probably have different names from those shown here 9 Now select any track in the Track Control Panel TCP right click and drag over any part of that track s media then click on the Toggle Zoom button That portion of the media item will be maximized while other tracks are minimized 10 Click on the button again to restore all tracks to normal view Here is a summary of the main SWS Zoom Actions Actions Comments Horizontal zoom to selected item s Zooms horizontally to display the entire length of item s selected without changing track height Toggle zoom to selected items Toggles zoom according to the selected media Variations include the options to hide or minimize all other tracks Toggle zoom to selected tracks time selection Toggles zoom according to the selected track and time selection Variations include the options to hide or minimize all other tracks Vertical zoom to selected items or tracks Zoom vertically to the selected item s or track s without changing horizontal display A variation is to minimize others Notice that these actions do not toggle Zoom to selected items Zooms horizontally and vertically to the selected item s Optional variation is to also minimize all other These c
223. r E apse wee 8 1 Floating VOID iramana seeta tee tatiana ws 18 Floating Toolbar assigning actions t0 cc0ceeeeeeeeeeees 18 folder management ACtIONS cccecccccccececeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaees 32 formatted marker lists csccssccosccsscosccsscesccssccscesees 62 formatted marker lists exporting cccceessesseeeeseeeeees 62 Freeze UnfeeZe MACTOS ccccssscoscccscescscscescscescecescces 141 FA cnable 100 016s 2 3 hiner cee aon aaae 135 FX management actions ccccccccccccccceccceeesseeeeeeeseeeeees 139 H Hide Filtered TrackS cccccsccosccsscosccnscsscossscesescecs 82 Hide in Both MCP and TCP ccc e eee cecceeccsecceccescececeecess 82 Hide Unselected Tracks ccccssscosscoscosscescesscesseecees 82 I Increase decrease VOIUME ccccsscesscosccsscescescecescces 133 Installing SWS exteNsiONs cccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeaeeeeseeeeaes 13 Invert Phaser ei EA 134 tem editing TACT OS sennen pageant uiecedle Sarid 42 item info floating toolbar cece ccccccceceeeeeeeeseeeaaes 23 KESE iane an R E O ah aE oD Iced gia te 29 K key maps CX POCO nacenan ates alee Dalal at 38 key maps Amporting 22224 RRR ee ee 38 keyboard shortcut assignments printing cccceseeeees 16 keyboard shortcut assignments VICWING cccsseeeeeeees 16 keyboard shortcut assigning actions t0 ccceseeeeeeees 17 keyboard shortcu
224. r management commands and actions can help you when you are project building If you like it use it Alternatively work out a system that suits you better and use that Tutorial This next tutorial will achieve the modest but often useful task of recoloring media items so that their color matches their TCP track panel It uses the action SWS Set selected item s to respective track color Let s assume that this action has been added to the media item context menu or assigned a keyboard shortcut 1 Still using StayWithMe66 RPP select any two media items and use the context menu to set them to random custom colors Let s suppose that later we want to make them the same as their respective track colors 2 Keep these items selected Using whichever method you prefer run the action SWS Set selected item s to respective track color If this command has not been assigned to any toolbar menu or keyboard shortcut you can run it directly from inside the Actions window 3 Save the file Note The value of this action becomes more evident if you use color coding with your media items when you are building your project file but then wish to clean up your cluttered colors when you move on to the mixing phase of your project If you find yourself making use of this command consider using it in a macro An example macro is provided in Section 6 9 73 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores l
225. r of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 8 4 3 Tutorial 3 The Selected Tracks Only Option Enabling the Selected Tracks Only option allows you to limit the use that you make of any snapshot to only the currently selected track s When this option is enabled only those snapshot settings relating to the currently selected track s are recalled In this next tutorial you will learn how to do this Let s take an example based on our two snapshots Full Mix 1 and Full Mix 2 We might like to listen to see how the Vocal settings for Full Mix 1 sound in combination with all the other track settings on Full Mix 2 and vice versa Then if we find something we like we might wish to save that combination as a New snapshot You need to be methodical and thorough when doing this but it is not difficult Tutorial 1 If the file StayWithMe842 is not still open open it Save it as StayWithMe8s43 2 In either the TCP or the MCP select the Vocals folder and its four child tracks 3 View the SWS Snapshots window Make sure that you SWS Snapshots have the Custom option Nene Date Mew Del Alt click selected and the filters for Initial Project 18 03 2010 sapere ove Ce Pan Volume and Solo all as il P O Full Track Mix selected Delay and Reserb 18 03 2010 C Current visibility 4 Make sure that Filter on Custom Recall is enabled and that Pan M volume Selected Tracks Only is z Mute _ F Chain not enabled Solo _ Sends 5 Select Full Mix 1
226. racks whose settings you want pasted into this projects Match each required source track in the copy from file to a destination track in the paste to file Specify which snapshot filters you want to apply that is which types of setting you want pasted and which you do not Specify whether you want the snapshot pasted directly into the project itself or as snapshot or both 6 When your Snapshot Paste settings are right click on OK to complete the process This first tutorial will guide you thru the basics Later you ll be shown a few more extra clever features Tutorial Part 1 In the first part of the tutorial we will take a copy of one of the snapshots that we created earlier and paste part of it it into another file In this case we will be copying an pasting our vocals settings from one file into another creating a new snapshot 1 Open the file StayWithMe847 and save it s StayWithMe8491 2 Create a new project window In this window open the file StayWithMe66 and save it as StayWithMe8492 115 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 SWS Snapshot Paste Source track Destination Filter master master Pan Yolume Vocals Vocals Mute Sete Vox Anne Vox Anne Vox Delay 1 Vow Delay 1 Solo sends Vox Delay 2 Vox Delay 2 ig Selec Wore Mat Vox Mak 1 au
227. roina A E 80 Color tN E Seanin an E A audi ie nieneacneaee 67 Colors WING OW aoaea a e r i A 71 command TDci ar A A E 25 command markers with custom command 00000 137 COMM OUST AC O E E AA E rated hata eae eens 16 Copy marker set to clipboard cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 37 lB sighs Vey i ok ot 10 0 ee ee ners Re ie ee 35 CUISCOMIMACIIONS naa EEA AE 79 custom toolbars and Menus esseeeeesseeeessesserssesseerssssrrree 15 COn MEDUS eA a EEEE 26 D Delete all MaKe S eroa a E 57 Deleteall res ions eee ee ee ee eee Dy Delete Marker Setrorro rana O A E 57 Delete related Project ssi esi seat vacevacavadecaderesd mintsistsinusieasisee 49 display Actions 255 c5eteco a oes tia aa eae 16 Dock Marker List in Docket cece eecccceeeecceeeeeees 57 60 Dock Tracklist in DOCK ER ison cdelatesictadetasentnce ccaadsanstessstncedens 81 Donate Sirsa teas aaa AAAA EOE 12 download sample project files cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 download SWS CxXtenSIONS cxcorcecachvecennanoadd us oeteenete 12 E Enable Auto Colorina Gersei 76 EvilDragon Color Toolbar cccccccsscsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 Exclusivo MC acces cet dct gta T 134 Exclusive record Ari cccccssccsscosccsscosccnsccsscsceceseuces 134 EXCIUSIVG SOlO csi alas aor ete eee 134 Export track list to clipboard ccccccccccccccccccceeseeceeeeneeeees ae exporting formatted marker lists cccccessesesseesseeeees 62 F Filter Tracke
228. roject 3 Select the project StayWithMe8491 Select the snapshot Full Mix 2 4 Choose the Custom Filter option and ensure that the only enabled filters are Pan FX Chain and Sends 5 Inthe TCP select all tracks except the folder Others and the two Harmonica tracks Right click over the track name or number of any track in the selection and choose SWS Snapshots Copy new snapshot selected tracks s SWS Snapshots Del Alt click Mew Save Ctrl click Filter Full Track Mix C Current visibility Custom Pan olume Mute Fe Chain Solo Sends vis Selection Import snapshot New snapshot 6 Select the new project snapshot Ensure that the SWS Snapshots window is open Right click over this and choose Paste Snapshot right 8 This causes the SWS Snapshot Paste window to be displayed Dock Snapshots in Docker Close Window SWS Snapshot Paste Source track Destination Filter Vocals create news Fan Woo Anne create new D os OO b w M e Vox Delay 1 Vox Delay 2 Yox Mat autars Guitar 1 Mak Guitar 2 Mak Guitar 1 Anne create new create new create new create new create new create new create new Fx Chain Sends Save changes 10 Guitar 2 Anne create new 14 Reverbs 15 YoxVverb 16 Verb create new create new create new Mame 9 Notice that the software has enough intelligence to work out for you
229. roject tabs then each time you select a different file to work with the Media Pool Files pane will display the media items for that file The following table summarizes what you can do in the media pool and how it is done Activity Explanation To add a group Click on the Add Group button You will be prompted to give the group a name Type the name and press Enter Use the dot in the Global column to make this group local or global Clicking on this dot toggles between these two group types In the example shown below two groups have been added one called Percussion and the other Guitars The Percussion group is global the Guitars group is local The 0 displayed against each group name indicates that neither of these groups yet includes and media files SWS Media Pool Groups Percussion You can change the status of groups from Global to Local and vice versa at any time 126 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 9 SWS Media Pool To add files to a group First select the required group in the Groups pane Then use any of the following methods Click on the Add Files button to open the Select Files window This window exhibits the characteristics of a normal Explorer window Navigate to the required folder click on the required file name or use Ctrl click to build up a list and click on Open or Open the REAPER Media Explorer
230. rrangements before deciding which you prefer to use for your final recording of a particular song 4 1 In any event before you even look at the available SWS commands and actions you need to understand one very important indeed critical fact about project management That is Organizing Your Projects No matter how good the SWS project management tools may be they will be of little or no use to you unless you yourself are prepared to take the time and trouble to organize your projects sensibly Let s take an example of this Suppose you are working on five songs that you want to include on a demo CD You don t need to organize these into a tidy filing system in order to do this but it will make life a lot easier for you if you do Remember that these five songs don t only belong together when you re working in REAPER they also belong to each other when you are copying the files to data DVD or backing them up to an external hard drive The screenshot below shows an example of how you might wish to organize your project files for a case such as this You have in this case on a D drive a main folder called REAPER Audio Projects This has a sub folder for each of your groups of project files These include a group called in this case Demo CD Within this folder there is a separate folder for each song that belongs in this group D REAPER Audio Projects Demo CD HungryMile ota E File Edit Help ni r F r Back gt a
231. rseeipeetiesedcareneta et 83 Lam o aE ac oy een Pee ree ee Peete Ses pr antares Sent ate are re Meyer unm T ner ere ER 83 7 4 Working With the SWS Tracklist Ny asinine coca catechnncis nandnnndnns inunbehaiaceniaiateleiceeteinaaaeacas 84 LSS o Macit Kapon Snor nnna 87 7 6 Track Visibility Snapshots canes tence vesenaseasiexcctecesadsacteniicisisiciaiicdeeeeeeadnsaaana ins ttsd tas eeeanaaaia 87 Fa REAPER MOIK ea pa feo AAA eer een et eee nce nt errr errr err ee 89 7 8 Visibility Snapshots and Project CHANGES ticscinnsisnssnacsavasascadaaaewevinewseevennasseisstaiesiissmineeteuineaneraes 91 Paa T E I R 91 O E aa E E E E E E E E 93 e Te ee E iia 94 om a e a a a EE EE AATE AEA A E A E EEEE EEE EE AA A AE T A 96 D Peona a T I cece eee 98 OF 50me Case Studies and TUOMAS ciiscirissctenaenendasasadeeenmumnnaianieeeen 99 6 4 1 T torial 1 Srhapshot Essentials sisisssisisiotuisiisisriddiruderodoriarinkar uieii 99 8 4 2 Tutorial 2 Understanding Snapshot FilterS s snsnenennnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnrnrnnnnnrnenrnnenne 101 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 8 4 3 Tutorial 3 The Selected Tracks Only ODUM iesicsws cornciescunrsnnacenssccasansectereniawincecaiinaenarednaweses 104 6 44 Tutorial 4 Sends and SMapshOlS iisiisisnininnininidniranininne tenance nasada CAEC EEE aii 105 8 4 5 Tutorial 5 Adding Tracks to Snapshots sssesesssnsnsnsnnrnrnnrrrrnrnrnnnnrnrnnrnnrnnnrnrnnrnrnenenenennnne 106 8 4 6 Tutorial 6 Delet
232. rticular files to a project You can then assign keyboard shortcuts to these actions 125 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 9 2 Using the SWS Media Pool SWS Media Pool Groups Path Filename Action Dr Reaper Projects Si 5 User Guide projectsStayWithMe Stay 07 Guitar 1 Mat ogg D Feaper Projects S S User Guide projectsiStay wikhMe Shay 06 Guitar 2 Mat ogg Dr Reaper Projects Si 5 User Guide projects StayWithMe Stay O2 vocal 4nne ogg Ci Reaper Projects S S User Guide projectsStayvWithMe Stay 05 Yocal Mat ogg D Reaper Projecks 5wW5 User Guide projectsyStay wikhMe Stay 09 Guitar 1 Anne ogg Dr Reaper Projects S S User Guide projectsiStay withMe Shay 10 Guitar 2 Anne ogg Di Reaper Projects Si 5 User Guide projectsStayWithMe Skay 11 Harmonica ogg Add Files Add Group To open the SWS Media Pool use the View SWS Media Pool command Of course you can assign a keyboard shortcut to this if you wish When you open the media pool the display will be similar to that shown above The very first time that you open it the only group present will be the Project group and by default this will be selected The Files pane will list all media files contained in that group If you keep the SWS Media Pool open while you close and open different flies or switch between files open on different p
233. ru slot 5 and next slot Restores any one of five previously saved loop selections Nudge section loop length Series of six different actions for making the currently selected loop longer or shorter or moving it to be earlier or later Remove time selection leave loop selection Unlike the Esc key which removes both time selection and loop selection this removes the time selection only Zoom to selected items Zooms horizontally and vertically to the selected item s Optional variation is to also minimize all other These commands are not toggles Save time selection slot 1 thru slot 5 Saves up to five different time selections for the project so that any of these can be recalled at will Restore time selection slot 1 thru slot 5 and next slot Restores any one of five previously saved time selections Move cursor creating time selection A series of actions to create a time selection starting at the current edit cursor position by extending a specified number of pixels either left or right Notice that some of the Xenakios SWS Move Cursor actions use the phrase configured pixels We ll see what this means shortly Meanwhile let s now look at some examples of how these actions can be used We will be working with the option Loop Points Linked to Time Selection turned Off 20 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lu
234. s After downloading you should unzip and copy the files to your usual REAPER projects folder You should also keep a spare copy of these files in case the need should arise for you to recover them to their original state 12 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 1 4 Installing the SWS Extensions Before you can install the SWS Extensions on to your computer you must first have REAPER v 3 4 or higher installed on your computer However it is strongly recommended that you should use the most recent version of REAPERthat is available Otherwise you might not be able to complete some of the tutorials in this user guide You should also check the SWS web site regularly for more information and later releases 1 Setting Up and Getting Started iF SWS Extension Setup License Agreement Please review the license agreement before installing S5 Extension IF vou accept all terms of the agreement click I Agree Copyright fc 2009 Tim Payne SWS Xenakios Permission is hereby granted Free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation Files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense andfor sell copies of the Software and to permit persons bo whom the Software is Furnished ta do so sub
235. s folder as necessary Hold Ctrl while clicking on the snapshot name Full Mix 3 to save the snapshot Also save the file As you play the song and switch between the different Full Mix snapshots the different FX chains for the female vocal will be loaded Save the file Checkpoint Before moving on to the rest of this tutorial let s just reinforce a fact or two The purpose of this tutorial has not been to teach you what you should or should not do with FX to enhance the sound of male or female vocals Indeed some of the settings used here could be considered to have been a little extreme The object of the exercise is to show you how you can use mixing snapshots to hold alternate FX chains for individual tracks or indeed for your whole project if you like This brings us to another consideration Every change that you make here will effect the final sound that is sent to the master In all probability you would therefore be likely to also wish to make for each individual mix changes to the parameter settings of some of the effects in the master FX chain Tutorial part 2 This part of the tutorial shows you how you can store track parameter T Fese R controls in your snapshots In this case we will take as an example one of the tracks that we used in the first part of this tutorial the female vocal Because we have used different FX chains in different mixing snapshots it can be handy to include parameter controls in our TCP
236. s Cubase Sonar or Pro Tools and are making the jump to REAPER then this book should give help fast tracking you into REAPER s design philosophy and ways of working which often are significantly different from what you re used to Foreword Acknowledgements and Preamble If you re reading this it should be safe to assume that you re already familiar with REAPER and that you ve had some experience of using that program for recording editing and mixing music One of the great things about REAPER is the way it lets you customize the program to suit your own requirements It does this with its skinable GUI its custom actions keyboard shortcuts macros and scripting support its menus and its toolbars and much more And on top of all this we have the SWS and Xenakios extensions These bring to REAPER whole new layers and levels of which I suspect the average user may be largely unaware Up until now these have been largely undocumented This guide is intended as far as possible to fill that gap I say as far as possible because there are literally hundreds and hundreds of these extensions They range from being almost substantial applications in their own right to being minor little features and everything in between To document every one in detail would take much much longer than the amount of time this author has available What I have aimed to do here is to take you on a guided tour of this world of extensions and actions showing
237. s follows EQ Band 3 Gain Compressor Threshold Compressor Wet Output Exciter Mix Exciter Drive 9 Using the same procedure as in steps 4 to 6 above place controls for each of these parameters into the MCP see right 10 When you have finished save these into the Full Mix 2 snapshot 11 Save also the file 12 Now as you switch between the different Snapshots the FX parameter controls displayed in the MCP will change each time displaying those controls that are most appropriate for that Snapshot Note In this tutorial you have assigned FX parameter controls to just one track and saved them into your mixing Snapshots You could of course do this for as many tracks as you wish Notice also that your FX parameter controls will also be displayed in the Track Control Panel see below You might wish to consider using Track View screen sets to make it easier for you to display and hide these as required a 3 Gain Balm Thresh 1 3 dB 21 8 dB For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to oaan ReaDelay Rea Eo ReaComp 8 SWS Snapshots Tutorial part 3 In the final part of this tutorial you will be shown how to include envelopes with your snapshots and how to use different envelope settings with different snapshots We ll take the example of adding a little high end sparkle to our reverb varying the amount of this in our three different main mixes
238. s region 12 4 SWS Media Pool Actions SWS Show media pool 12 5 SWS Context Sensitive Actions SWS Copy items tracks env obeying time sel SWS Cut items tracks env obeying time sel SWS Remove items tracks env obeying time sel SWS Split items at time sel if exists else at edit cursor SWS Unselect all items tracks env points SWS Unselect all items tracks env points depending on focus 145 SWSMA_DISABLE SWSMA_ENABLE SWS_MNUDGEL SWS_MNUDGER SWSMA_RUNEDIT SWSMA_TOGGLE SWSMARKERLIST5 SWSML_TOCLIPTIMESEL SWSMARKERLIST9 SWSMARKERLIST10 SWSMARKERLIST4 SWSMARKERLIST11 SWSMARKERLIST12 SWSMARKERLIST2 SWSMARKERLIST1 SWSMARKERLIST6 SWSMARKERLIST7 SWSMARKERLIST8 SWSMARKERLIST3 SWS_SELNEXTREG SWS_SELPREVREG SWSMP_OPEN SWS_SMARTCOPY SWS_SMARTCUT SWS_SMARTREMOVE SWS_SMARTSPLIT SWS_UNSELALL SWS_SMARTUNSEL For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 12 6 SWS Freeze Unfreeze Actions SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS Restore active takes on selected track s Restore last item selection on selected track s Restore loop selection next slot Restore loop selection slot 1 thru 5 Restore saved selected item s Restore selected track s items states Restore selected tra
239. s that are now included in the SWS extension set were originally developed by Xenakios 11 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 1 2 Downloading the SWS Extensions The SWS extensions have been developed by Tim Payne of Standing Water Studios For more information about Tim and Standing Water Studios visit http www standingwaterstudios com You will need to go to that web site in order to download the latest copy of the SWS Extension pack Google REAPER General Discussion D Home Standing Water Stu lt C ft hittp wwwstandingwaterstudios com index php gt Or gt Getting Started 4 Forums 4 Google Aus _ Media J Other Banks oO Bendigo Bank NetBank REAPER gt C Other bookmarks m a won AY a Home Installation Features FAQ Source Submit Bug Report Studio Contact Welcome to the home of the SWS Extension Installation The SWS Xenakios extension adds some addtional features to Reaper 5 the Digital Audio Workstation DAW software by Cockos Inc Features right or if you d like more information check out the features Submit Bug Report Studio If you re interested in Standing Water Studios the studio go to the studio Contact page Download Here Lastest SWS extension v1 7 1 18 Updated Sun 04 18 2010 FAQ If you re in a hurry jus
240. s vw O 000 PSEC Offset 0 99 to 9922 Strength 100 O to 100 Envelope MIDI CC Cancel Generate In the example shown here the action Envelope LFO Generator has been used with an existing pan envelope on a Guitars folder so as to control the panning for the time selection of the entire submix REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 2 10 So Many Actions So Few Keys One commonly heard and understandable complaint is that REAPER has many more assignable actions than there are keyboard combinations or than you can realistically expect to fit on a custom toolbar or menu Add the SWS and Xenakios extensions into this mix and this problem gets worse Start creating your own custom actions and macros and you can fund yourself in trouble Something to keep in mind is that REAPER allows you to use more keyboard combinations than you might at first realise Apart from using alphanumeric and other keys on their own PC users can use them in combination with any of Shift Control Alt and since REAPER 3 41 Win windows key For OS X users the equivalents are Shift Command Option and Control The examples used throughout this book use PC examples For example you could assign to an action just K or perhaps Ctri K or perhaps Shift Win kK Even so you might still run out of easily accessible combinations One way of dealing with this is to take advantage of a feature of REAPER that is often overlooke
241. se mark the beginning and end of each vocal passage of the song 6 Create regions shown above for each of the passages between marker 1 and marker 2 and marker 3 and marker 4 respectively To do this you need in each case to make a time selection between the two markers then use the context menu command to Create Region from Selection Name these markers Verse 1 and Verse 2 The last section of this chapter includes a handy macro that will do this 7 Right click over the Marker List window to display its context menu Choose Save Marker Set then when prompted type Vocals and press Enter 8 To check that this has worked right click over the SWS Marker List to display its menu The command Load Vocals should now appear on this menu 58 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 10 11 12 5 SWS Marker Management To show how this works choose the Delete all Markers then the Delete All Regions command from this menu Right click again and choose Load Vocals from the menu SWS Marker List see right Your markers and regions will now be restored Description Save marker set Now delete all markers and regions again Delete market set Now create two markers and a region for the harmonica as Dey marker Sele bo apis shown below d ae a E ee ILH Start eT ca a e al g ca eT ee ee ee 4 toed free Seeded
242. selection then double click on this to make it the first command in your custom action Then select SWS Select all folders parents only and double click to add it to the custom action Repeat this for Track Cycle selected folder collapsed state and for SWS Restore saved track selection Select the option to Consolidate Undo Points see below Edit Custom Action Filter Custom action name Lews Toggle Folder Display Recall snapshot 3 S S Save current track selection Recall snapshot SAMS Select all folders parents only gt Renumber marker Ds Track Cycle selected folder collapsed state Renumber region IDs Sw S Restore saved track selection Restore active takes on selected track s Restore arrange view Restore auto crosstade state Restore last tem selection on selected tracki Restore loop selection nest slot Restore loop selection slot 1 Restore loop selection slot 2 Restore loop selection slot 3 Restore loop selection slot 4 Restore loop selection slot 5 Restore master Fs enabled state Consolidate undo points Restore saved selected them s Restore saved track selection Show in actions menu Restore selected trackls items states 4 Click on OK 5 If you wish to assign a keyboard shortcut and or a control surface button to this action click on the Add button and specify the keystroke combination and or control surface button as you did in Chapter 2 Then
243. simply right click over the window and choose Dock Tracklist in Docker from the context menu When docked you can access this menu by right clicking over the docked tab The SWS Tracklist manager also works closely with the SWS Snapshots manager to make a very powerful team We ll get to this in Chapter 8 81 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 7 1 SWS Tracklist Commands and Options The table below offers a summary of the main SWS Tracklist commands and options together with a brief explanation of each Shortly you ll have the opportunity to work thru a tutorial which will show you how they are used Command Option Explanation The SWS Tracklist Window and its Options The Main Window This consists of four columns Track Number Track name TCP and MCP You can for example Use this window to select any track s in the same way as in the TCP and MCP click to select control click to add to selection etc Double click on any track name to edit or rename it Select any track name s and use the Delete key to delete it Use the TCP and MCP columns to show hide any track s in the TCP and or MCP Filter Box Enter part or all of a track name to specify a track view filter For example vo would select all tracks that include Vox or Vocal in their track name Hide Filtered Tr
244. snapshot and edit name Open snapshots window Paste snapshot Recall current snapshot Restore snapshot filter options Save as snapshot 1 thru 12 Save current snapshot filter options Save over current snapshot Select current snapshot track s Set snapshots to mix mode Set snapshots to visibility mode SWS_UNSELPARENTS SWS_UNSELRECARM SWS_ADDRELATEDPROJ SWS_DELRELATEDPROJ SWS_PROJLIST_OPEN SWS_PROJLISTSOPEN SWS_OPENRELATED1 SWS_PROJLISTSAVE SWS_LASTPROJTAB SWS_FIRSTPROJTAB SWS_PROJTAB2 SWS PROJTAB10 SWSSNAPSHOT_GET1 SWSSNAPSHOT_GET12 SWSSNAPSHOTS_ADD SWSSNAPSHOT_ADD SWSSNAPSHOT_CLEARFILT SWSSNAPSHOT_COPY SWSSNAPSHOT_COPYALL SWSSNAPSHOT_COPYSEL SWSSNAPSHOTS_DEL SWSSNAPSHOT_DEL SWSSNAPSHOT_NEWALL SWSSNAPSHOT_NEWSEL SWSSNAPSHOT_NEW SWSSNAPSHOT_NEWEDIT SWSSNAPSHOT_OPEN SWSSNAPSHOT_PASTE SWSSNAPSHOT_GET SWSSNAPSHOT_RESTFILT SWSSNAPSHOT_SAVE1 SWSSNAPSHOT_SAVE12 SWSSNAPSHOT_SAVEFILT SWSSNAPSHOT_SAVE SWSSNAPSHOT_SEL SWSSNAPSHOT_MIXMODE SWSSNAPSHOT_VISMODE For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS SWS 12 Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions Toggle snapshot apply filter to recall Toggle snapshot fx Toggle snapshot mute Toggle snapshot pan Toggle snapshot selected only Toggle snapshot selection Toggle snapshot sends Toggle sna
245. sorted by name see above previous page Save the file again 104 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 8 4 4 Tutorial 4 Sends and Snapshots This tutorial introduces you to saving and recalling Sends settings in mixing snapshots There s more to it than you might think In this tutorial you will learn vy How to save changes to sends in your mixer snapshots vy How to blend sends snapshot settings into your mixes Tutorial 1 If the file StayWithMe843 is not still open open it Save it as StayWithMe844 2 First we are going to save the current sends and Snapshot Details their settings to a new snapshot 3 Select the Custom filter option and disable all Snapshot 6 Sends 1 stored 19 03 2010 8 52 AM filter types except Sends Make sure that Masta a Selected Tracks Only is not selected Master Track Hardware outputs 4 Click the New button name your new filter Phone L Sends 1 and press Enter aaa ee 5 Right click over this and choose Show Track 1 Vocals Snapshot Details Scroll thru this window sends Pal Gaerne shown on the right for a quick check on the Sacer e Taian Snapshot s contents Close the window Track 2 Vox Anne 6 With Sends 1 still selected display the Receives sends e te for the VoxVerb track Delete the Receive from To track 4 Yox Delay g the Harmonica track Track 3 V
246. t the Marker List window Delete market set You should consider leaving the window floating ERTE undocked when you are creating your markers Lael enimanlige k and marker sets but docked when you have all Load General or most of these set up 0 00db15 R Copy marker set to clipboard This brings you at last these two possible Paste marker set From clipboard advantages 3 Reorder marker IDs v It saves significantly on screen real ag Ute Reorder region IDs estate Delete selected markeris v You can still access any of the marker Delete all markers list context menu commands by right clicking over the Marker List tab in the Delete all regions Export formatted marker list ta clipboard docker without even having to give 1 med Export format focus to the Marker List window see Pyle right o EA E Dock Marker List in Docker Close Window You can of course still display the docked marker list window by simply left clicking on its tab As you continue to work thru the other chapters of this User Guide keep in mind that the other SWS module windows that you will encounter can also be docked and undocked in this way 60 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 5 SWS Marker Management 5 6 Copying Markers Between Projects Using The SWS Marker List and or SWS Actions you can copy markers
247. t download the installer from the link on your Source Xenakios s web page is here Win x32 Download Win x64 Download OSX universal binary Still running Reaper v2 x 2010 Tim Payne Standing Water Studios Home Site Map Login Use the links near the bottom right corner of the screen to obtain the correct version for your system Windows 32 Windows 64 or OSX Just like REAPER itself because these extensions have been efficiently coded the file size has been kept to a minimum For example for the 32 bit Windows version this is no ore than about 400 kb The extensions are updated regularly and frequently so you should check for regular updates Thanks to Tim s generosity the SWS Extensions are distributed free of charge This does not mean however that they are produced without cost Please observe the Donate button in the lower right corner of the screen and be prepared to use it Unless you are genuinely unable to afford it a suggested suitable amount to donate would be at least 10 00 1 3 Downloading the Sample Project Files In addition to the SWS Extension Pack you should also download the sample project files that are used in the various examples used in this guide You will need these if you are to be able to work thru the various step by step tutorials that accompany each chapter Download information for these is included in the introductory section of this guide just before the Table of Content
248. t marker set into the project in the next project tab then prompt you for a name and save it as a markers et in that file Don t forget the File gt Save Project at the end Marker sets are saved inside the project RPP file If you forget to save the project file you lose the marker sets 66 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 6 SWS Color Management 6 SWS Color Management 6 1 The SWS Color Management System The color utilities included in the SWS extension set allow easier setting of track and item colors You can even create and apply your own color sets for use with both tracks and media items either individually or as group selections The SWS Color Management system is by default available directly by using the SWS Track Color commands which can be found on v The Track Control Panel context menu accessed also from the Mixer View and v The Item Settings sub menu of the Media Items context menu You can of course also add any of the commands and actions to one of your toolbars or other menus or assign them keyboard shortcuts You can also edit either of the two menus referred to above for example to move any of the SWS commands higher up the list if you wish An example of this is shown below where the SWS Track Color commands have been promoted to the top level of the Media Items context menu To do this you simply need to open th
249. t the currently selected media item One advantage of showing this toolbar is that it enables you to use the information display area at the bottom of the Track Control Panel to display some other information such as CPU RAM usage and how long it has been since you last saved Note If you have completed the tutorials contained in this chapter then you will have made yourself quite a handy navigation toolbar See if you can improve it Look thru the other actions used for navigation zooming and so on to see if you can find any that you could usefully add to your toolbar Keep in mind though that you do not need to add actions to a toolbar Another way as you have already seen is to assign them to shortcut keys Yet another as you will soon discover is to add them to one or more of REAPER s menus 23 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 2 5 3 The Project Media Files Window The Xenakios extensions include a number of other windows which can be used to display information about your projects and to help you manage them An example is the Project Media Files window This can be found on the main Extensions menu under Misc Experimental as well as in the Actions list It can be used with any project that has its own project folder Project Media Files Hide file paths Files used by pr
250. t to clipboard Export Format Dock Marker List in Docker Close Window E i BIG oN Display of the SWS Marker List can be toggled using any of these methods vy Choose View from the main menu then SWS Marker List v Choose Edit from the main menu then SWS Marker Utilities then Show SWS Marker List v Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Shift M The various commands that you have at your disposal for managing your markers and regions can be accessed by right clicking over the Marker List window see above or from the Edit SWS Marker Utilities menu see right Glue selected items SS Marker utilibes Show SWS Markerlist Ctrl ShiFk M Default menu Main edit Load marker set Bowe Dawe Save marker set 7148 Delete marker set 090008 Copy marker set ta clipboard Paste marker set From clipboard Reorder region IDs Reorder marker IDs h Delete all markers Delete all regions Export tracklist to clipboard Tracklist Format 13 media pol r F 1 13 55 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 5 2 Available Marker Actions Before exploring the powerful features that the SWS Marker List has to offer it s worth taking a moment to review the most important of the marker actions that are available to y
251. tars 1 autars Guitar 1 Mat Guitar 1 Mat Guitar 2 Mat Guitar 2 Mat C Save changes Guitar 1 Anne 9 Guitar 1 Anne Guitar 2 Anne 10 Guitar 2 Anne Others 11 Others Harmonica 1 12 Harmonica Harmonica 2 1 Vocals Reverbs 13 Reverbs VoxVerb 14 VoxVerb Verb 15 verb coo Oe OT E oo Poe 1 2 a 4 z 6 7 5 Mame Display the Snapshots window for StayWithMe8492 and with Full Track Mix selected create a new snapshot called Initial Mix This is a good precaution to take Save the file Select the file StayWithMe8491 and in the Snapshots window click on Full Mix 2 Right click over this and choose Copy Snapshot Select the file StayWithMe8492 then select the Snapshots window Right click over the empty area and choose Paste Snapshot This causes the SWS Snapshot Paste window to be displayed We only want to paste the snapshot data for the first five tracks In this window click on track 6 then hold Shift while clicking on the last track This selects all tracks from track 6 onwards Click on the Remove button to remove them from the display Complete your settings as shown below All filters are enabled the data will be saved into a new snapshot called Vocal FX but the project itself will not be updated with the changes SWS Snapshot Paste Filter Source track raster 1 Vocals 2 Yox 4nne St Vox Delay 1 4 Vox Delay 2 5 vox Mat Destination raster 1 Vocals 2 Yox 4nne 3 vox
252. ted Tracks Height to A Xenakios SWS Set Selected Tracks Height to B 1 Open the file StayWithMe66 RPP and save it as StayWithMe74 RPP 2 Lay your screen out in a similar fashion to that shown above You have access to both the TCP and MCP at the same time but navigating either of these to get to individual tracks might be rather tricky 3 Select the SWS Tracklist window Right click over the column header area and select both Mute and Solo to ensure that these columns are displayed 4 Play the song As you do so experiment with the solo and or mute controls to discover just how much fingertip control this window gives you For example you could try the following one at a time Solo Guitars Unsolo Guitars Solo Vocals Unsolo Vocals Solo Reverbs Alternately mute unmute Reverbs Mute Vocals 5 Don t limit your Mute Solo exploration to just those few suggested examples The more you try it out the more you will realize how useful this capability is 6 Let s now suppose that we wish to work specifically with the Guitar tracks for a while In the Filter box type gui 7 Enable the options Hide Filtered Tracks and Link TCP and MCP Vis for visibility Experiment with toggling the Hide Filtered Tracks option on and off Notice how disabling it brings your other tracks back into view but the Filter box remembers what you last typed there 8 Click on the Clear button in the SWS Tracklist window to clear the filter Now click in the SWS Tracklist
253. tensions v 1 7 1 92 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots 8 SWS Snapshots SWS Snapshots sometimes called SWS Mixing Snapshots for me deliver the most important powerful and useful feature of the entire SWS extension pack This is because they open up for you mixing opportunities that are quite simply staggering Shown below is the status of the Snapshots window for the project file StayWithMe77 RPP as it was at the end of Chapter 7 Snapshots Del Alk click n Dat Ti New ame ate lbs Save Ctrl click Guitars Only 13 03 2010 5 09 PM Filter Vocals only 13 03 2010 10 49 AM Reverb 1303 2010 10 49 AM Full Track Mix All Tracks 13 03 2010 10 50 AM Current Visibility C Custom Filter on Recall Selected Tracks Only Prompt For Name Hide Mew Tracks on Vis Recall Hide Options If your display does not include the panel on the right with the New button at the top then clicking on the Show Options button will cause it to be displayed At this point the Show Options button will be replaced by a Hide Options button There s a lot to understand in the SWS Snapshots module Let s start by identifying the various components of the window itself Component Explanation The Column Headers This serves a function similar to the column header in the Marker List window You can determine which c
254. th Project Files Allow Load of Undo History Description Load snapshot Sends 2 Load snapshot Full Mis 3 Load snapshot Sends 1 Load snapshot Sends 2 Load snapshot Full Mie 3 Load snapshot Full Mts 1 Load snapshot Full Mie 3 Load snapshot Full Mis 1 Load snapshot Full Mi 2 Load snapshot Full Mie 3 Load snapshot Full Mis 1 Load snapshot Full Mie 2 Close Fs Chain Config Fs Parameter Adjustment Fs Parameter Adjustment Fs Parameter Adjustment Fs Parameter Adjustment Add Fs To Chain Change Track Selection Load snapshot Full Mie 3 Load snapshot Initial Project Load snapshot Full Mie 3 Save snapshot 1 Toggle track mute Load snapshot Initial Project Load snapshot Full Mie 3 Time 037 19 10 11 21 07 03 19 10 11 21 06 037 19 10 11 21 04 037 19 10 11 21 03 037 19 10 11 21 02 037 19 10 11 21 00 03 19 10 11 20 52 037 19 10 11 20 51 037 19 10 11 20 50 037 19 10 11 18 23 037 19 10 11 19 22 037 19 10 17 19 20 037 19 10 11 19 12 037 19 10 11 19 09 03 19 10 11 15 06 03719710 11 19 04 037 19 10 11 19 02 037 19 10 11 15 00 037 19 10 11 18 48 037 19 10 11 18 35 037 19 10 11 17 04 037 19 10 11 17 02 03 19 10 11 17 00 037 19 10 11 13 52 037 19 10 11 13 22 037 19 10 11 13 17 SASS dAn dda Aes lt Undo History Meron Usage 13 95 30 00 ME 107 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7
255. tha s Song 0 03 27 0 02 55 absolute time at the end Track 3 We Till The Soil 0 02 36 0 06 23 Track 4 We Are The Boys 0 03 24 0 09 00 This time we have removed the leading space in each line and added the absolute time at the end 64 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 5 SWS Marker Management 5 8 Other SWS Marker List Window Features The SWS Marker List incorporates a number of other features that are common to the other SWS windows such as the Tracklist and Snapshots window These features are summarized in this section 5 8 1 Windows Screen Set Compatibility All of the SWS windows are dockable This Bl akai windows means that they can be i docked in and Global window views H Name Load kep Save kep undocked from the 1 Default Alt 1 Shift F1 docker 2 Master 1 Alt Shift F2 3 Master 2 Alt 3 Shift F 3 They are also fully 4 Mixing 1 Alt 4 Shift F4 z Mixing 2 z compatible with S Genea SWS Marker List REAPER s Windows i Time Type Description screen sets g 0 29 064 Region Verse a 1 1 42 818 Marker vi End When you save a E 1 42 818 Marker Wi End E 208 029 Region Verse 2 Windows screen set i 2 08 029 Marker v2 Start the SWS windows 3 35 286 Marker YZ End status and position l open or close docked or floating size etc are saved into that screen set and will be recalled with it
256. the snapshots that we created earlier and paste a different part of it it into another file In this case we will be copying an pasting our harmonica settings from one file into another This time instead of creating a new snapshot we will paste the data only directly into the project itself not creating a special snapshot for it This task is a little trickier than before partly because the track arrangement is not the same in both projects 1 If the two project files StayWithMe491 and StayWithMe8492 are not still open open them both in separate project tabs 2 Select StayWithMe8491 and from the Snapshots window select this time Full Mix 1 Right click over this and choose Copy Snapshot 3 Select the project StayWithMe8492 Right click in the Snapshots window and choose Paste Snapshot 4 Inthe Snapshot Paste window remove all tracks except the three shown here __ SWS Snapshot Paste Source track Destination Filter 11 Others 11 Others Pan Volume 12 Harmonica 1 12 Harmonica e Mute EX Chain 13 Harmonica 2 1 Vocals Salo Sends Save changes Mame 5 If you study the Source and Destination track list carefully you can see we have a problem The tracks don t match up 117 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 6 Because the destination file does not contain a Harmo
257. track management features are both handy and easy to use but they do have their limitations For example vy You can choose to hide individual tracks or selections of tracks in the TCP or the MCP but not both v The Filter Tracks window can be used to select which tracks are to be shown or hidden by part or all of their track name However as ia 000 0p long as this window is open it 7735 777 keeps focus see right This I makes it impossible to work on Tick name gui your arrangement while this window remains open I Action vy REAPER s Track View screen sets do not include the current hide show status of your tracks This issue causes a fair amount of confusion but in short the reason for this is because track view screen sets were never intended to include this function The SWS Tracklist manager has been designed to address these and as you will shortly see several other issues Its window is displayed below It can be opened by choosing View SWS Tracklist from the REAPER main menu You can of course assign a keyboard shortcut to this command if you wish SWS Tracklist Name Vocals vox Anne Vox Delay 1 Vox Delay 2 Yox Mat autars Guitar 1 Mat Guitar 2 Mat Guitar 1 Anne Guitar 2 anne Others Harmonica Reverbs VoxVerb Verb oo J om Oo E oo ha e Filter Clear Hide Filtered Tracks K Link TCP and MCP Vis This window like most others can be docked if you wish it to be You
258. tracks except tracks 2 3 and 4 A text file reaconsole_customcommands txt stored at the same location as reaper ini can be used to store any ReaConsole custom commands that you create You can create or open this file manually or if using the PC version of REAPER by running the action SWS Edit console custom commands The first time that you run this action you will be told that the file does not exist and asked if you wish to create it Click on Yes to open Notepad with this file created After adding your commands save the file The commands will be available next time you start REAPER They will appear in the Actions list and can therefore be assigned keyboard shortcuts to menus and or to toolbars to be used with any project files For example suppose that to your command file you added these two lines Ovo Ogui Actions You would then find that Filter Sw run con c when you restart REAPER Tee CmdID Custom IC these actions will be SWS Run console command Ugur 52021 _ SWSCOh available to you to solo S S Run console command Ovo s3020 _S wSCOI exclusive respectively all tracks whose names begin with Vo or all tracks whose names begin with Gui These commands could of course be included in your custom action macros Another powerful use for custom commands is for creating command markers Store these in your reaconsole_customcommands txt file and you will be able to use keyboard shortcuts to create action
259. ts remOVINg cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 L IFO Genera ORe tara salina tle 37 Toke TC Pand MCP oraaa deseo alesse 82 Load Markor Sette tose eee as 57 OPACO IS 5 52 eck eee eae ola elation 20 M markera chon aana a hood bat tats a facetnn cat ewamincoeton Menace 56 Marker List Potmats 02 64 Markert modile nari 55 Marker ct cee eT a a n a a aaa 58 Marker WTS enai a a A 55 37 markers copying between projects cccceceeceeeseseseeeees 61 master track actions TO s ce a E TE 34 media files manageMent cccccccceesseseeeeeesseeeeeeesaeeeees 24 Medid Poo loanenene a a eaten 125 Media pool ca ee 125 Media Pool files adding cece eeeeeeeeesseesseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 127 Media pool sroup typeset eer nenie a aN a a a 125 Media Pool group creating c ccccccceecceeeseeeeeeeseeeees 126 Media Pool items USING ccccccccccccceeeeeceeseeeseeeeaeeeees 128 IMIECIN OLY SOUS ereraa i E E Conse 29 Menus CUSO Mie ene ascii atthe estates 15 Mixing Snapshots sc cceiw iwi ee ee 93 TUE STATIS 10 OOS chet ee cee aha Cal hd al 134 N navigation ACUONS cacti hit hn cacalcntiieaialsaiocs shsliasidehaieaseebanaa eee 16 O Opens projects froni histerie 49 Ordered CUSLOM COLOLS eoruin iiaae 68 rs ani Zine Pi Ol CCtS tic ec asain ee 47 P PANNA ae ard ieee N O 133 panning CHANGING ssnin netaa TEE 133 Paste marker set from clipboard cccceceessssseeccceeeeeeeees 57 PREVIEW IMEI a
260. ttp stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 8 4 5 Tutorial 5 Adding Tracks to Snapshots In this next section we are going to deal with a situation where a track or number of tracks are added to a project after you have created a number of snapshots If you add any extra tracks then those tracks will be displayed and used alongside your snapshots other than visibility snapshots where you may choose to keep them hidden whether they are added to the snapshots or not However unless you also take the extra step of actually adding them to your various snapshots their track settings will not be saved into your snapshots This will be easier to understand after you have worked thru an example Tutorial In this tutorial we ll add an extra harmonica track together with some track settings such as volume and pan levels We will then add that track to each of our three Full Mix snapshots 1 If the file StayWithMe844 is not still open open it Save it as StayWithMe845 Select the snapshot Full Mix 1 2 Make sure that Full Track Mix is selected in the Filter column 3 Create a second Harmonica track by duplicating the existing one Make sure that these two tracks are both included within the Others folder and renamed Harmonica 1 and Harmonica 2 as shown below 4 Set the Volume for both Harmonicas at about 4 5 dB Pan the first 25 left and the second 25 right
261. ulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 6 7 REAPER s Color Tinting Preferences Color Management is definitely an area where it pays to know your REAPER Preferences and how to use them There are not that many preference settings which impact on how your tracks and media items are colored but those that are there can be quite dramatic in their impact REAP ER Preferences Defaults a Appearance settings _ l Ul updates Lazy when recording default Track buffered Ww eVICE MIDI Devices Tooltip delay Tooltips for Ul elements Tooltips for emsernvelopes atari Themed play cursor width avbac A Peccrina Faster text rendering reduces antialiasing Show last undo point in menu bar Media Show guide lines when editing Peaks Wavetorms Solid edge on time selection highlight Solid edge on loop selection VU Met eee a Don t scale toolbar buttons below 1 1 Don t scale toolbar buttons above 1 1 Editing Behavior Track contral panels Envelopes Set track label background to custom track colors Tint track panel backgrounds i ae Align TCP controls when track icons are used edia ane MIDI Track grouping indicators Ribbons Lines on edge None Under the Appearance page of preferences settings you have two specific ReaEO ReaDelay ReaDelay Go volume_pan ReaComp tea Comp ReaEQ Track Control Panel ReaFir coloring options
262. us option buttons and the like it works by accepting short and simple commands that you type in to its edit box In overview you do this v Use the command View SWS ReaConsole or the default keyboard shortcut C to open ReaConsole vy Type your command in the edit box vy Press Enter to execute the command and close ReaConsole or Ctrl Enter to execute the command and keep ReaConsole open vy Press Esc to close ReaConsole at any time Note that while ReaConsole remains open it will take control of your PC keyboard For example by default in REAPER s arrangement view the letter V will normally toggle the display of a track s Volume envelope With ReaConsole open however that same letter V will represent ReaConsole s Volume command Tutorial Let s start with just a couple of examples to help you see how ReaConsole works For this first tutorial please keep to these simple examples We ll explore its more sophisticated capabilities in more detail later 1 Open the file StayWithMe847 and save it as StayWithMe101 SWS ReaConsole 2 Play the song from the beginning m 3 4 3 Open the SWS Snapshots Window Make sure Toggle mute on 3 ox Delay 1 4 ox Delay 2 Full Track Mix is enabled and select Full Mix 2 4 Open ReaConsole The command for toggle mute is simply the letter m followed by the number s of the track s to be muted It is important to use lower case here When you type a command a help message is displayed an
263. used in any order you wish This represents the marker or region count starting at 1 It will not necessarily be the same as the region or marker ID number displayed on the timeline The marker or region ID number The length of the item in hours minutes and seconds The absolute time in hours minutes and seconds This is accumulative For example if you have four songs of each exactly three minutes each at the start of the fourth song the absolute time will be 9 minutes The absolute time measured in project samples The marker or region description commonly referred to as its name This is the text that you see displayed above the timeline Note In the OSX version of the SWS Extensions REAPER uses an internal clipboard This means that unfortunately you cannot paste a formatted marker list into another program when using this version 63 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Examples of Marker List Formats Taking the same example as that shown in the illustration at the beginning of this section 5 7 lets examine some SWS Marker List examples of how you could create a Tine eae formatted marker list for export TEE i Brady s Song SER Region 1 Brady s Song The project is for a demo CD consisting Marker 5 We Til The Soil of four tracks The start of each track is A Re
264. ustom color 2 Track performance options I Set to custom color 3 Track grouping parameters Ss I Set to custom color 4 Track grouping enabled T Set to custom color 5 Show master in track view Ctrl lt M E Set to custom color 6 SWS Snapshots WH Set to custom color 7 WH Set to custom color 8 WY Set to custom color 9 WW Set to custom color 10 WH Set to custom color 11 WH Set to custom color 12 WW Set to custom color 13 WY Set to custom color 14 WY Set to custom color 15 WH Set to custom color 16 Color management Set timebase For selected tracks Sek automation mode For selected tracks Sek automation mode For all tracks Extensions Track Mixer Envelopes v The ability to store and recall together several project files as a group v The ability to create use and recall mixing snapshots vy More power in the way you can manage views and windows This is just a small selection of the topics that you will learn from working thru this User Guide Even if you have used some of the SWS extensions before you will get the most out of this book if you work your way thru from the beginning and omit nothing You just might get more than a few pleasant surprises along the way The name of Xenakios has already been mentioned in the acknowledgements but his contribution to the development of these snapshots has been so enormous that it is only fitting that he should get another mention here Many of the fine extensions actions and command
265. ute on all others Exclusive mute all tracks whose names begin with dru or perc Toggle arm tracks 2 and 3 ready for recording Record arm enable tracks 2 and 3 Record arm disable all tracks whose name begins with vox Record arm disable all tracks Record arm enable all tracks Record arm toggle all tracks whose name begins with guitar Record arm tracks 5 thru 8 unarm all others Record arm all tracks whose name begins with drum unarm all others Record arm track 8 unarm all others Set input for track 2 to input 3 Set input for track to to paired stereo input 3 4 Set input for any track named synth to MIDI channel 4 Sets inputs on tracks 1 to 8 incrementally starting with input 1 Track 2 is set to input 2 track 3 to input 3 and so on Flip phase on track 4 Flip phase on tracks 1 3 and 8 Invert phase only on track 7 Invert phase only on tracks 1 thru 4 Invert phase only on all tracks with guit in their name For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 10 SWS ReaConsole Toggle FX enable tee case status for selected track s or specified tracks Set exclusive FX Ta enable status for case selected track s or specified tracks Set track name Prefix track name E Suffix track name Set track color Add action marker at edit cursor Note the syntax used Toggle FX bypass on track 5 aes Toggle FX
266. utorial 1 Open the file StayWithMe RPP and save it as StayWithMe68 2 For the purpose of this example select all tracks then right click over any track name to SWS Auto Color display the context menu Filter Color 3 Choose the Set Track Color to Default TT verre command This gives us a starting point 4 Click on the Add button to add a filter Double click on the text name and type Vo 5 Click on the small color box see position of mouse cursor right to open the color selector window Select a color and click OK 6 Add another filter and name it Guit Select a color of your choice for this filter cara Enable auto coloring 7 Click on Force or Apply depending on which button is displayed The colors will automatically be applied to your tracks Tick the box labelled Enable Auto Coloring 9 Close the Auto Color window then save and close the file 10 Open any of your other project files whose track names include Vo and Guit These tracks will now be automatically colored according to your color filter definitions 11 For the sake of the exercise add an extra track to this file and name it Another Vocal It will be automatically colored for you 76 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 6 SWS Color Management 6 8 1 Auto Color Filter Codes Special codes can be used to ensure that
267. ve already seen when you create a file list you are able to easily and quickly open all files in that list with a single command This is not the case with related projects Related projects are simply listed on the File SWS Project Management menu as a quick and easy way of accessing them whenever the project to which they have been related is open This loose and informal arrangement has many potential applications For example you might have some project files which contain a large number of audio samples that you might wish to use when building a new project By relating the sample files to the new file you can be sure that these sample files can at any time be easily accessed Another example could be when you are working on a number of different project files perhaps as part of a CD or some other collection If you open one of these projects and then relate the others to it it becomes easy for you to work on two or more of these projects together if you wish to Unlike the file lists used in section 4 3 information about related projects is not stored in a separate file Instead the information is written into the RPP file that has focus at the time the other files are related to it Tutorial In this example you will learn how to relate a number of projects to an open RPP project file Use any of your own existing project files for this exercise 1 Close any REAPER projects that you have currently open 2 Open any project file of
268. ve been deleted from it so that it now consists of four separate items 3 Vode B0A nng The following macro will allow you to recover any deleted segment including for example that between markers 1 and 2 Incidentally the markers here are of no special significance They are there solely to help illustrate the example Create Custom Action Filter 9 ve add Custom action name swe Restore Deleted Area SS Add term s to left of selected item s to selection SS Add item s to right of selected item s to selection SWS Add tterm s to right of selected ttem s to selection Nee Heal plita i i selected items SS Add related project s SS Add selected track s to all snapshots S S Add selected track s to current snapshot SS Open console with T to add action marker Remove selected Consolidate undo points Show in actions menu You could now select any item immediately to the left of any deleted portion that you wish to restore then run this macro In the example shown above you could select the third item then run this macro to restore the portion between markers 1 and 2 42 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 3 Building Simple Custom Action Macros The following table lists some of the SWS actions that you might find useful when creating your own item editing macros Actions Comments Add item s to l
269. ve options determine how the snapshot contents will be filtered when a snapshot is saved or when it is recalled with the Filter on Recall option enabled Current Visibility If Full Track Mix is selected then all mixing options are enabled Pan Volume Mute Solo FX Chain and Sends Visibility and Selection are not included If Current Visibility is selected then only track visibility is enabled If Custom is selected then you are able to choose as many or as few but at least one of the eight available options as you want 96 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 8 SWS Snapshots Command Option Action Explanation With Pan enabled track pan settings are saved into and can be recalled with the snapshot These include the left right positioning of track pan faders but not any track pan law that might have been selected Track pan automation envelopes however are not included with these track pan settings If you wish pan automation to be included you should put one of the available JS pan plug ins into the track s FX chain and create an envelope to go with it You will then need to also enable the FX Chain as one of your filter options With Volume enabled track fader volume levels are saved into and can be recalled with the snapshot Volume Track volume automation envelopes however are not included with these track volume
270. ve screen shot It may not be obvious from the resolution of the graphic image but a toolbar named Zoom Edit has been selected you could of course name it anything you wish The following actions have been included in this toolbar These actions add considerably to to functionality of the Tracklist window SWS Show selected track s in MCP hide others SWS Show selected track s in TCP hide others SWS Show all tracks in MCP SWS Show all tracks in TCP Before proceeding on to the tutorial you are strongly recommended to add icons for each of these four actions to one of your floating toolbars or to the main REAPER toolbar To do this you will need to open the Customize Menus Toolbars window from the Options menu and then select the required toolbar from the drop down list To add your actions click on the Add button then select each required action in turn and click on Select Close the Actions window when finished then Save and Close the Customize Menus Toolbars window See the REAPER User Guide for more information options etc 84 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 7 SWS Tracklist and Track Management Tutorial This tutorial will work best for you if you have added to one of your floating toolbars the four actions suggested on the previous page as well as the two actions suggested in Section 2 5 1 Xenakios SWS Set Selec
271. vox o anne mand or banj Increase volume of selected tracks by 2 dB Increase volume of selected tracks by 1 8 dB Decrease volume of selected tracks by 3 dB Increase volume of track 2 by 3 dB Increase volume of tracks 3 and 5 thru 7 by 2 dB Lower the volume of all tracks whose names begin with vox by 2 5 dB Set volume of selected tracks to 5 dB Set volume of selected tracks to 0 dB Set volume of all tracks whose names end in verb to 2 dB Set volume of tracks 7 thru 9 to 0 dB Set volume of tracks 2 5 and 8 to 1 dB Pan selected tracks 10 further right Pan selected tracks 5 further left Pan all tracks whose name begins with guit 15 further right Pan tracks 12 and 13 8 further left Set pan for currently selected tracks at 50 right Set pan for currently selected tracks at 10 left Set pan for any track called banjo at 23 right Set pan for track 12 to 33 left Toggle solo status for currently selected tracks Enable solo for currently selected tracks Toggle solo status for tracks 7 thru 10 Toggle solo status for tracks 6 7 11 and 12 Toggle solo status for all tracks whose name begins with vox Enable solo on all tracks whose name begins with VOX Disable solo on all tracks whose name ends with anne The Inverted Track Selection feature can be especially useful when used with the o command see Advanced ReaConsole Features For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to
272. waw D 5amples Snarel wav ae E OL ae a a EE a a a ess aa ee Ti To assign shortcut keys to This is done in the same way as you would if you were assigning keys to media pool actions any other actions Open the Actions list select the required action then click on Add to define the required keystrokes See below Shortcut Description CmdID Custom ID S S Insert D 5amples H andClap waw from media pool A999 _SWSMP_A5 F108 S S Insert O S amples HighT om waw from media pool A996 _SWSMP_DS018D SWS Insert O S amples kick 1 way from media pool A954 _SWSMP_DDAGF S S Insert OS amples Kick way from media pool A995 _SWSMP_SD64 76 SWS Insert O S amplessLowT ona from media pool F400 _SWSMP_5SBOUBA SWS Insert O S armplesSMidT om waw from media pool Asoo _SWSMP_Abdd 94 S S Insert OS amples Snare way from media pool A998 _SWSOMP_EO S66 4 Shortcuts for selected action Alt k ml Custom actions New 128 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 9 SWS Media Pool Activity Explanation To insert a file from the Use any of the following methods media pool into the current Drag and drop from the media pool into the project s arrangement project window This method has the advantage of allowing you to place the media item exactly where you wish or Double click on the name of the media item in the media
273. ween the two snapshots Full Mix 1 and Full Mix 2 As you do so the envelopes will change Tip If in the above tutorial you float the FX window in this case the LOSER Exciter plug in and leave it open and displayed when you save the snapshot changes then that window will be recalled whenever the snapshot is recalled 8 4 8 Tutorial 8 Visibility Snapshots and Project Changes In this tutorial we will pick up from where we left off in Chapter 7 and address the question of what to do when more tracks are added to a project after you have created some visibility snapshots Two Snapshot window features are important here These are v The Hide New Tracks on Vis Recall filter and vy The Add Selected Track s to Snapshot command Contrary to what might seem intuitive the safest way to handle this is to disable the option Hide New Tracks on Vis Recall at first This makes it easier for you to decide just how you want to handle your new tracks Tutorial 1 Open the file StayWithMe77 and save it as StayWithMe848 2 Open the Snapshots Window Make sure that Full Track Mix is selected and that Hide New Tracks on Vis Recall is not enabled 3 For the sake of this exercise double click in the TCP just below the last track to create a new track Call this track Fiddle We can pretend that e have recorded some material here 4 Select track 2 Vox Anne and press Ctri T to insert a new track immediately below it Name this track Vox Extra Sav
274. window We can use this to make it easier to explore the subject area in which we are currently interested 16 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 2 Simple SWS Actions Little Things That Mean a Lot 3 Type zoom in the filter box Immediately only those actions which include zoom in their descriptions are shown Let s restrict the search further Actions Filter zoom SWS Find shortcut Sectors Shortcut Description SWS Horizontal zoom to selected items s SW5 Toggle zoom to sel items s SWS Toggle zoom to sel items s hide other tracks Toggle zoom to sel temele minimize other tracks Toggle zoom to sel track s time sel hide others Toggle zoom to sel track s time sel minimize others Vertical zoom to selected tterms s Vertical zoom to selected items s minimize others Vertical zoom to selected track s Vertical zoom to selected track s minimize others Zoom to selected items Zoom to selected temis minimize others Shortcuts for selected action Custom actions Mew 4 Add to the filter box the letters sws so that it now displays zoom sws Now only the SWS zoom actions are shown y1 Select the action SWS Toggle zoom to sel track s time sel 6 In REAPER s arrangement window select say track 5 in the track control panel then right click and drag over that track s media
275. x as you like as you play the song Now click once on the Initial Mix text in the SWS Snapshots window Your project settings will all be restored to their former state That in a nutshell demonstrates what a mixer snapshot does We are now about to create two new snapshots Click on the New button When prompted for a name type Fill Mix 1 and press Enter Repeat this step this time naming the snapshot Full Mix 2 Save the file At present both these snapshots are identical not only to each other but also to the Initial Mix snapshot That s about to change Play the song Select Full Mix 1 Let s make just one simple change Set the volume on Vox Anne to about 3 dB Right click over the text Full Mix 1 and choose Overwrite Snapshot This change is now saved Save the file Select Full Mix 2 Set the Pan fader for Vox Anne to about 15 left Because of the way the two tracks are grouped Vox Mat will automatically go to about 15 right Hold the Shift key while you then drag the Pan fader for Vox Mat back to the center Set the Volume fader of the Vocals mix folder to about 1 dB Set the Volume on Agee Vox Anne at about 0 0 cB 1 Initial Mix Increase the Volume on 2 Full Mix 1 Vox Mat by about a decibel ae Lower both of the Vox Delay tracks by about 3 dB each Move the Pan fader on Guitar 1 Anne to about 60 right Because of the way the tracks have been grouped the pan faders on the other three guitar tracks will also be
276. x consists of two main sections namely v An edit box at the top in which you enter the necessary Absolute time in project samples codes along with any text to ensure that the material will be formatted in the way you require it and You can include normal text in the Format IF vou want to use one of the above vy Some explanatory notes These are further explained in the characters in normal text preface it with table and examples below Of course at the bottom of this edit box you will find the usual OK and Cancel buttons These are self explanatory a or One of the letters a all that is regions and markers r regions only or m ror markers only should always be the first letter of your format code The example shown on the previous page uses both regions and markers This will enable us to show you how these different options work m Your Text At any point after the initial single letter code you can include any text that you want included with every item in the export list If that text includes any of the letters n I d t or s then those letters must be preceded by a backslash For example you might want to include one or more of your codes in parentheses or you might wish to include a word such as Track or Item The word Track would be written Track Text can be inserted before your other format code in amongst them or after them as you please The remaining format codes can be
277. y Trim untrim item left edge to edit cursor Trim untrim item right edge to edit cursor 12 24 Xenakios SWS Takes Management Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Delete active take of item and send source media to recycle bin Delete active take of item and take source media immediately Find missing media for project s takes Implode items to takes and pan symmetrically Normalize selected takes to dB value Nudge active take volume down Nudge active take volume up Open audio take in external editor 3 Open audio take in external editor 4 Recall selected takes Rename selected take s old version Rename selected takes with BWAV Description Rename take source file s 158 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 12 Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Xenakios SWS Summary of SWS and SWS Xenakios Modules and Actions Rename take s and source file s Rename take s Rename takes with same name Render item to new take with tail Reset active take volume to 0 0 Search takes Select first take in selected it
278. y go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 Tutorial This tutorial assumes that you are familiar with REAPER s Track View Screen Sets or at least their basics For the purposes of learning in this tutorial we will use only simple screen sets Feel free to be more ambitious if you wish 1 Open the file StayWithMe74 RPP and save it as StayWithMe77 RPP 2 Choose View Screen Sets to open the REAPER Screen Sets Window Click on the Track View tab 3 Press Ctrl Pg Dn to view the whole project and press the key once or twice as necessary to minimize all tracks 4 Use the Save State button to save this screen set as screen set 1 called Fill Project Min Press Page Up four times to increase the track height Save this view to screen set 2 called Full Project Show Vus 6 Using whichever method you prefer keys is easy zoom horizontally so that only about 30 secs of your project timeline is visible Save this to another track view screen set set 3 as 30 secs with Vus 7 Use the key to minimize track height Save this as track screen set 4 30 secs Min Height 8 Save the file Start with the Full Project show VUs screen set and All Tracks snapshots both selected see below Arrange your windows so that both the track arrangement view and mixer view are visible DAS FS OB ll A oe coe cm ward iid s iig ir T T T T Load Load Load Load Load Evek O
279. you have done this you simply save it as an SWS Color Set Keep in mind the following tips v You can create as many different color sets as you like However only one set can be displayed on the SWS Color menus at one time vy You would normally store your color sets directly in your REAPER Color Themes directory or folder However vy you can associate any color set with any particular theme by saving that color set into its existing ReaperTheme file something like MyColors ReaperTheme If you do this you can load the color set whenever that theme is active by choosing Load Colors from Current Theme from the SWS Color Management window Tutorial In this exercise you will be shown how to create and save a number of different color sets and then select any of them for use It is assumed that the project StayWithMe63 RPP is still open 1 2 3 Display the SWS Color Management Window Click on Set Custom Colors to open the Windows Color window Notice that there are 16 small boxes reserved for custom colors Click on the first of these to select it Use the color palette and the vertical bar as in the previous tutorial to select your preferred color Click on the Add to Custom Colors button Click on the next of the custom color boxes to select it Repeat the necessary steps to select your next custom color then click the Add to Custom Colors button Repeat this process until you have defined all 16 custom colors see
280. you understand how to use these extensions It s then up to you to determine for yourself which of the many available SWS extension actions will be most useful to you 15 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 The six methods that you can use to execute an action are as follows Directly from within the Actions list v By displaying it in REAPER s Actions menu vy By assigning a shortcut key to the action v By assigning it to an external control surface v By adding the action to any of REAPER s menus v By adding the action to one of REAPER s toolbars Note To display and optionally print a list of current keyboard shortcut assignments choose the command Help HTML Lists auto generated Keyboard Shortcuts from the REAPER menu To display and optionally print a list of all available actions choose the command Help Help HTML Lists auto generated Actions an eran from the REAPER menu HTML lists auto generated a Keyboard shortcuts In both cases the information will be E ER ea eae ah displayed in HTML format using your default LPs T een Bee eee web browser See ee ee re TNE 2 3 Zoom Display and Navigation Actions In this section you will be shown how SWS extension actions integrated with REAPER s own native actions can be used to give you more control and f
281. your choice 3 Choose the File SWS Project Management command then Add Related Project 4 When the Select Related Project s dialog box appears see below navigate to the required project and click Open Select related project s Look ir 9 Connaught Rangers m E Fi c m My A ecent Documents Desktop My Documents 5 My Computer File name Connaught Rangers APP ka Files of type Reaper Project APP ha i hly ee Open as read only 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 three times selecting each time another project that you would like to be related 53 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 REAPER Plus The Power of SWS Extensions v 1 7 1 6 If you now display the File SWS Project Management submenu you will see that these four project flies are now listed there Select any one of these it will be opened in a new project tabs You should now have two projects open 7 Display the File SWS Project Management submenu for the file that you have just opened It will not list any related projects The relationships that you have created all exist in the first file only Of course you can create equivalent relationships for this file if you wish 8 Now select your first project file again 9 Use the File SWS Project Management command to create another new file relationship 10 Open another of these files from the F
282. zan ADDO OOS fA oe Vox Delay 2 Vox Mat n2 Hamna AGO G8 E vbs DODO 00A wW ve ACTO 00A ee Filter _ Hide Filtered Tracks Link TCP and MCP vis 20 Right click over the Tracklist window and choose Show All Tracks All tracks are now restored to both views 21 Save this file 22 Continue to explore and experiment with the many flexible track display and management options that the SWS Tracklist puts at your disposal Do not yet use either the Snapshot Current Track Visibility or Show SWS Snapshots options we will come to both of these shortly 23 When you are finished use the Show All command in the context menu to restore all tracks to view unsoloed and unmuted in both the TCP and the MCP 24 Save the file 86 For an authorised printable PDF version of this guide or a bound hard copy go to http stores lulu com store php fAcctID 1374784 7 SWS Tracklist and Track Management 7 5 SWS Tracklist Keyboard Shortcuts There s a number of useful keyboard shortcuts that you can use when working inside the Tracklist window These are summarized below Left Arrow Toggle show hide selected track s in MCP Right Arrow Toggle show hide selected track s in TCP Ctrl Alt Hold these keys while left clicking on a TCP or MCP dot within the current track selection to hide all tracks not in that track selection Hold while clicking on TCP or MCP dot for any track over ride Link TCP and MCP option w

REAPER Plus! The Power of SWS Extensions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents